PROJECT MANUAL HYATT HOUSE AT BELMAR LAKEWOOD, CO

PROJECT MANUAL
HYATT HOUSE AT BELMAR
LAKEWOOD, CO
L/K PROJECT NO. 13534
DATE OF ISSUE: May 16, 2014
VOLUME 2 – DIVISION 15 - 16
DENNIS D. SMITH, AIA
ARCHITECTS
345 RIVERVIEW WICHITA, KANSAS 67203
Phone (316) 268-0230 Fax (316) 268-0205
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HYATT HOUSE AT BELMAR
LAKEWOOD, CO
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15053
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
15058
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
15062
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHAICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15077
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL PIPNG AND EQUIPMENT
15082
PLUMBING INSULATION
15803
HVAC INSULATION
15092
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15097
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15111
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15122
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
15145
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15155
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
15160
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15165
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
15183
REFRIGERANT PIPING
15195
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
15300
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15441
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
15446
SUMP PUMPS
15450
WATER STORAGE TANKS
15469
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
15486
FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS
15671
AIR COOLED HEAT PUMPS
15731
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONERS
15733
ROOFTOP REPLACEMENT-AIR UNITS
15738
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15755
DEHIDIFICATION UNITS
15762
UNIT HEATERS
15785
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
15815
METAL DUCTS
15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15831
FAN-COIL UNITS
15838
POWER VENTILATORS
15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
15856
INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1
LK 13534
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16110
CONDUITS
16120
WIRES AND CABLES
16125
PULLING CABLES
16131
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
16134
OUTLET BOXES
16140
WIRING DEVICES
16180
MOTORS
16185
MOTOR STARTERS
16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16212
EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND ACCESSORIES
16440
EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT
16450
GROUNDING
16470
PANELBOARDS
16475
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16500
LIGHTING
16700
LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16720
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16740
EMPTY CONDUIT FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
16780
EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR TELEVISION ANTENNA
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2
LK 13534
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Conditions of this section apply in all circumstances to the work of Division 15, and are
in addition to the requirements of other specification sections.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Work provided under Division 15 shall include as specified and indicated on drawings
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
HVAC systems and equipment.
Exhaust and ventilation systems.
Automatic control systems.
Rough-ins, future connections, and provisions for systems to include:
a.
Kitchen equipment.
b.
Laundry equipment.
Sanitary waste and vent systems.
Storm water drainage systems.
Domestic hot and cold water systems.
Water softeners and filtration.
Back-flow prevention.
Utility service connections and meters.
Fuel gas systems.
Appliance flues and vents.
Condensate drain systems.
Miscellaneous materials, products, equipment, or systems that may be required
to provide a complete product.
B.
These design documents are diagrammatic do not necessarily reflect the final installed
configuration or conditions. These drawings and specifications provide the scope,
quality, and function of material, equipment, and systems to be installed. The drawings
and specifications are complimentary documents; where clarification is required, a
written request shall be directed to the Engineer for additional information.
C.
These drawings and specifications shall not be interpreted to indicate divisions of
responsibility. Contract agreements, trade jurisdictions, or local customs shall
determine divisions of responsibility. Each contractor shall be responsible for being
fully familiar with all sections of the drawings and specifications for this project in order
to identify the complete scope of work required for a complete and functional product.
15010 - 1
LK 13534
D.
Provide a complete and functional product.
Where miscellaneous equipment,
hardware, connections, and services are required by applicable codes, regulations,
standards, system function, or common practice they shall be provided to make a
complete product; whether specifically indicated by the drawings or specifications.
Where necessary coordinate with all required trades to ensure all necessary
requirements for a complete product are met.
E.
Warranty: Provide a product free from defects in materials and workmanship. Include
the following:
1.
Minimum of five (5) years on air conditioner compressors.
2.
Minimum of two (2) years on variable frequency drives.
3.
Minimum of ten (10) years on gas heat exchanger equipment.
4.
Minimum of three (3) years on automated controls system.
5.
Minimum of three (3) years manufacturers warranty on dampers and valve
actuators.
6.
Minimum of one (1) year on defects in general workmanship and miscellaneous
materials and equipment.
7.
All warranty dates are to be clearly marked on each piece of equipment and are
to be from date of Substantial Completion.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Division 1 “Submittals and Substitutions”.
B.
Submittal Review: Review of shop drawings and product data is only for conformance
with the design concept of the project and compliance with information given in the
contract documents. In the event of variation in information provided in the submittal
and information given in the drawings and specifications; the drawings and
specification shall govern. Shop drawing and product data submittal packages are not
contract documents and shall not act to modify any contract requirement.
15010 - 2
LK 13534
C.
1.5
A.
Submit product data and shop drawings for all products and materials to be
incorporated into the final product. One (1) copy of submittals and shop drawings with
review comment shall be returned; additional copies shall be made by the contractor.
Submittals and shop drawings not complying with the following requirements shall be
returned without review. Include the following:
1.
Provide submittals and shop drawings only for products listed within these
specifications, or products approved in writing prior to bidding for incorporation in
this project
2.
Review and approve documents prior to submitting. Stamp, date, and initial each
copy indicating review is complete.
3.
Submittals for products and equipment requiring actuation or connections by the
Control Contractor shall be reviewed by the Control Contractor prior to
submitting. Stamp, date, and initial each copy indicating review is complete.
4.
Indicate only exact information pertaining to product to be supplied. Include the
following:
a.
Plan designation
b.
Model.
c.
Capacities.
d.
Options provided: Indicate only options specific to the equipment provided
for this project.
e.
Dimensions: Indicate all necessary dimensions. Include the following:
1)
Maximum height, width, and depth.
2)
Clearance for operation.
3)
Clearance for maintenance and service.
4)
Dimensions to openings, connections, and divisions.
5)
Rough-in clearances and openings.
6)
Mounting surface and connection dimensions.
f.
Weight: Indicate point loads and center of gravity if weight is not uniformly
distributed.
g.
Installation and start-up instructions and requirements.
h.
Storage and handling instructions.
i.
Electrical requirements.
j.
Wiring diagrams.
k.
Operation and Maintenance instructions.
l.
Warranty.
5.
Submit product data for all equipment, products, and materials to be incorporated
into the project.
6.
Submit shop drawings for all equipment, products, and materials requiring
coordination with other trades, electrical or control connections, requiring
structural support, requiring rough-ins, or other data only presentable in drawing
form.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Reference Standards: Incorporate the adopted edition with amendments, or latest
edition of the following:
1.
Model Building Codes adopted by the governing Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
3.
Americans Disability Act (ADA).
15010 - 3
LK 13534
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
listing and labels.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
American Gas Association (AGA).
American Pipe Fittings Association (APFA).
American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE).
American Welding Society (AWS).
American Water Works Association (AWWA).
Copper Development Association (CDA).
Compressed Gas Association (CGA).
Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association (GAMA).
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
Plastic Pipe and Fitting Association (PPFA).
Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI).
National Insulation Association (NIA).
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA).
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB).
Manufacturers Standardizations Society (MSS).
Mechanical Contractors Association of America (MCAA).
Air Diffusion Council (ADC).
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
Manufacturer’s installation data.
B.
Provide all supervision as required to fully comply with all project requirements. All
personnel in a supervisory role shall have verifiable experience with products, systems,
and constructions similar in nature to the requirements of this project.
C.
Use only trained and skilled craftsmen, competent and knowledgeable in the craft
being performed. Maintain supervision to ensure proper coordination, sequencing, and
scheduling of work.
D.
Provide quality control procedures to ensure the highest quality of work. Visually verify
and physically test all systems before work is concealed, covered, or building finishes
are installed. Document all test results and inspections; maintain records for inclusion
in project close out documents.
E.
Provide start-up for all equipment and systems installed. Start-up services to be
performed by trained and skilled tradesmen authorized by the manufacturer to perform
15010 - 4
LK 13534
start-up and warranty services. Document all start-up and test results; maintain
records for inclusion in project close out documents.
F.
Provide, at final acceptance by the owner, products, equipment, and systems that are
in complete and proper functioning order. The final product delivered to the owner
shall be of the highest quality as indicated by drawings and specifications.
G.
Provide record documentation, test results, and documents as indicated by drawings
and specifications.
H.
All work is subject to the final approval of the Engineer; work judged by the Engineer to
be unsatisfactory with respect to these plans and specifications shall be repaired or
removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at the contractor’s expense.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
The contractor shall coordinate, receive, store, transport, and install owner provided
equipment the same as if the equipment were procured by the contractor.
B.
Procure, coordinate, and schedule, all products, material, equipment, labor, and
services as indicated by drawings and specifications.
C.
Receive, inspect, store, and protect, all products, material, and equipment, indicated by
drawings and specifications at the project site or an alternative location of the
contractors choosing and expense. Protection of all products, material, and equipment
from theft, damage, and destruction is the responsibility of the contractor until final
acceptance by the owner.
D.
Time is of the essence, schedule, monitor, and track deliveries to ensure that all
products, material, equipment, labor, and services are delivered to the project in a
timely fashion to avoid impact to the project schedule or influence the work of other
trades. Do not cause or create congestion or crowding of the project site by delivering
and storing products, material, and equipment beyond the space reasonably available.
E.
Provide all necessary cribbing, dunnage, rigging, cranes, lifts, hoists, dollies, vehicles,
and manpower to safely offload, store, move, and place products, equipment, and
material. Handle all products, equipment, and material according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
1.7
A.
COORDINATION
These design documents are diagrammatic do not necessarily reflect the final install
configuration or conditions. The contractor is responsible for the final arrangement of
all installed equipment, components, and systems. All work is subject to the final
approval of the Engineer; work judged by the Engineer to be unsatisfactory with
respect to these plans and specifications shall be repaired or removed and replaced to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, at the contractor’s expense.
15010 - 5
LK 13534
B.
Work indicated by drawings and specification is considered constructible as indicated.
Actual purchased equipment, construction materials and methods, and varying site
conditions make it necessary for the installing contractors to perform actual
construction coordination to be used in construction.
C.
Prepare coordination drawings, of an appropriate scale, indicating location and
elevation of all elements of construction. Include the work of all trades for review and
approval by all trades. Maintain coordination drawings, indicating each trades
approval, on the project site for use by all trades.
D.
Coordinate penetrations, rough-ins and block-outs as required in permanent
construction for routing and access of building systems. Trades using penetrations,
rough-ins, and block-outs shall be responsible for the final location of penetrations,
rough-ins, and block-outs. Set sleeves, rough-ins, and block-outs in permanent
construction components as they are constructed.
E.
Coordinate all footings, bases, imbeds, anchors, supports, braces, bollards, and
structural openings before the fabrication and placement of permanent building
elements. Provide all necessary locations, dimensions, weights, templates, imbeds,
anchors, etc. as required. Provide information in a timely manner to avoid delays or
impacts to project schedule.
F.
Coordinate rough-ins and final connections for equipment provided by other trades or
the owner and requiring utility services. Verify utility and connection requirements for
equipment before installing rough-ins. Make final connections to equipment following
delivery and placement of equipment.
1.8
MODIFICATIONS
A.
Minor deviations from the design documents are anticipated as related to location,
routing, arrangement, orientation, aspect ratios, or similar details. These alterations do
not require written approval when they do not change the design intent or materially
alter the look, feel, or performance of the finished product, and are implemented
according to all applicable codes, standards, specifications, and accepted installation
practices.
B.
Modifications are considered significant in nature when they result in a change to the
design intent, look, feel, or performance of the finished product. Modifications
significant in nature shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing. Requests for
modifications shall include a complete description of the change accompanied by all
necessary documentation to evaluate the request. The required shall include, but not
necessarily be limited to, scaled drawings, engineering calculations, equipment/product
data sheets, cost estimates, and etc.
C.
Modifications made without written approval from the Engineer shall be considered
unsatisfactory work and shall be repaired or removed and replaced at the contractor’s
expense, regardless of when the defect is made known to the Engineer. The Engineer
cannot accept responsibility for significant modifications made without the prior
consideration and approval of the engineer.
15010 - 6
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUMMARY
A.
Refer to Division 1 “Submittals and Substitutions”
B.
Basis of Design: Products specifically indicated by manufacturer and model number
within drawings and specifications form the basis for design. Alternate manufacturers
listed within these specifications may offer products similar to those indicated in the
basis for design. Alternate products shall in every aspect equal or exceed the quality
and performance of the Basis of Design product. Responsibility for suitability shall be
fully upon the contractor when, equipment other than that indicated as the basis for
design, is used. This responsibility includes, but is not limited to:
1.
Structural modifications.
2.
Electrical modifications.
3.
Sound, seismic, and vibration restraints and abatement.
4.
Automatic control system modifications.
5.
Configuration of building elements and components.
6.
Duct, vent, piping, and drain system modifications.
7.
Completed system performance and capacity.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Refer to specifications under Division 15.
B.
All products of a similar use, type, or application, provided for this project shall be of a
single manufacturer approved for incorporation in the final product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PERMITS/INSPECTIONS
A.
Apply for and obtain all necessary permits. The contractor shall pay all required fees
for permits.
B.
Request and complete all required inspections. The contractor shall pay all required
fees for inspections. The contractor shall maintain documentation of successful
completion of inspections and shall transmit documentation to the owner.
3.2
A.
EXAMINATION
Become fully familiar with all sections and divisions of drawings and specifications.
Plan and execute work in a manner most expedient to the total project schedule. Avoid
impeding the work of other trades or impeding the project schedule by placing or
performing work out of sequence or phase.
15010 - 7
LK 13534
B.
3.3
Develop and maintain a project schedule for work to be performed. Review total
project schedule, provide input as needed to allow proper intervals to perform work and
prevent stacking of trades. Coordinate activities with total project schedule, adjust
activities as required to comply with total project schedule.
DEMOLITION
A.
Fully examine all plans and specifications to become familiar with the complete project
scope.
B.
Become fully familiar with all existing conditions of the project site and construction,
and fully document all existing conditions prior to the beginning of any work.
C.
Develop and fully coordinate with all trades and the owner a demolition plan to facilitate
the required work with the least disruption or inconvenience to the owner. The owner
shall have the right to final approval of all work plans.
D.
Provide all necessary labor, materials, and equipment required for the safe removal
and demolition of existing construction. The owner’s property shall be fully protected
from damage and contamination as a result of construction activities. The contractor
shall be responsible for repairing and restoring any damage to the owner’s facility as a
result of construction activities.
E.
Provide all necessary disposal equipment, containers, and services as required to
properly remove and dispose of discarded materials. All discarded materials shall be
disposed in a proper manner consistent with all applicable laws, codes, and standards.
The disposal of all hazardous and regulated materials shall be properly documented
and the documentation transmitted to the owner.
F.
Prior to the commencement of new work all unused, and abandoned equipment,
materials, and accessories shall be completely removed and any necessary repairs or
restorations completed prior to installing new work.
3.4
PERFORMANCE
A.
Employee only fully trained and experienced professional craftsmen to execute work.
Apprentices shall only be employed when under the direct supervision of qualified
journeymen. All work shall be executed with the highest regard for quality, which is
demonstrated in both the appearance and performance of the installed systems.
B.
Provide all necessary material, equipment, tools, lifts, platforms, cranes, rigging,
vehicles, management, labor, facilities, etc. to perform the work indicated by drawings
and specifications.
C.
Drawings plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
15010 - 8
LK 13534
D.
Install equipment, utilities, and systems per coordination plans and drawings. Do not
deviate from coordination plans and drawings, unless all trades have agreed to
proposed deviations.
E.
Install equipment and systems to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations.
F.
Install equipment and systems level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, per applicable installation instructions. Maintain all
required slopes, elevations, and orientations.
G.
Remove all excess material, debris, and construction waste immediately upon
completion of work activities.
H.
Install all work in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
3.5
A.
3.6
TEMPORARY SERVICES
Permanent systems are for the exclusive benefit of the owner. Permanent systems
shall not be used for construction purposes. Provide temporary systems and services
as needed for the completion of construction activities.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect all equipment, systems, and work in place or stored on the project site.
Conduct all activities with highest regard and respect for the protection and
preservation of project. Damaged equipment, systems and work shall be repaired or
replaced to deliver a product in new condition at no cost to owner.
B.
Protect work in progress as follows:
1.
Maintain manufacturers protective covers, guards, and packaging until system is
ready to be placed in operation.
2.
Piping systems:
a.
Cap and protect open ends of pipe.
b.
Protect material to be installed from contamination by dirt, water, debris,
and other foreign material.
3.
Duct Systems:
a.
Cover ends of duct systems under construction.
b.
Cover ends of duct stored, waiting installation.
c.
Cover all system outlets until system is placed in operation.
d.
Cover all system inlets until system is placed in operation.
e.
Cover all system inlets with bulk filter media until system is accepted by
owner.
4.
Refrigeration Systems:
a.
Cap and protect open ends of pipe.
b.
Maintain dry-nitrogen purge on all open pipes.
15010 - 9
LK 13534
5.
6.
7.
3.7
A.
Sanitary and Special Waste Systems:
a.
Cap and protect open ends of pipe.
b.
Cover all inlets until final acceptance by owner.
Storm Drainage Systems:
a.
Cap and protect open ends of pipe.
b.
Maintain all inlets free of debris until acceptance by owner.
Equipment and Fixtures:
a.
Cover openings until final connections are made.
b.
Cover and close all access and inspection openings.
c.
Set fixtures in place only after finishes are complete and initial cleaning has
been completed.
d.
Maintain protective covering on all fixtures until acceptance by owner.
COMMISSIONING
Prepare schedule and plan to activate, and start-up all building systems and
components. Coordinate activities with all associated trades, subcontractors, service
providers, and owner’s representative. Include as a minimum the following:
1.
Initial inspection; verify installation is complete.
a.
Perform on site visual inspection of equipment and systems to verify that
construction is complete.
2.
Preliminary start-up.
a.
Verify proper utilities and services are connected and functional.
b.
Remove all packing, temporary guards and coverings, shipping brackets,
etc.
c.
Perform preliminary adjustments and tests required by installation
instructions.
3.
Factory start-up.
a.
Schedule factory start-up.
b.
Document start-up and any required follow up activities.
4.
System verification and adjustment.
a.
Verify all functional aspects of mechanical/plumbing systems.
b.
Adjust and verify components and controls as needed.
5.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
a.
Prepare required documentation.
b.
Perform TAB functions; making necessary adjustments as needed.
c.
Document and notify contractor and Engineer of any system deficiencies.
d.
Re-test as required after system deficiencies are corrected.
6.
Operational testing.
a.
Schedule all required witness tests with required authorities, Architect,
Engineer, and, Owner’s Representative.
b.
Perform required witness tests and document. Correct any deficiencies
and repeat procedure as required.
7.
Final inspections.
a.
Schedule inspections with Architect, Engineer, Owner’s Representative,
and other interested parties.
b.
Perform inspections and document results. Correct any deficiencies and
repeat as required.
8.
Owner instruction and training.
a.
Prepare required documentation.
15010 - 10
LK 13534
b.
3.8
Schedule training:
1)
Develop training schedule in logical sequence and segments;
building to a complete facility.
2)
Allow appropriate time for adequate instruction and discussion.
3)
Develop schedule to include vendors, manufacturers, and
subcontractors associated with system.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Refer to Division 1 “Contract Closeout”.
B.
Final Adjustments: Perform as a minimum the following adjustments:
1.
Replace all filters.
2.
Lubricate all moving bearings, hinges, joints, etc.
3.
Adjust belt tension on all drive belts.
4.
Check and adjust packing on valves, pumps, etc.
5.
Check and replace, as needed all indicator lamps.
6.
Clean all exterior surfaces of equipment; repair paint and finish as needed.
7.
Clean all accessible interior areas of equipment.
8.
Remove all tools, equipment, material, and debris from project.
C.
Loose Materials: Deliver all loose keys, tools, accessories, and material to owner.
Include the following:
1.
Detailed inventory including; model numbers, quantity, and application.
D.
Record Documents: Deliver all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
END OF SECTION
15010 - 11
LK 13534
SECTION 15053
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Transition fittings.
3.
Dielectric fittings.
4.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
5.
Sleeves.
6.
Escutcheons.
7.
Grout.
8.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9.
Painting and finishing.
10. Concrete bases.
11. Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
2.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
15053 - 1
LK 13534
3.
G.
1.4
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Transition fittings.
2.
Dielectric fittings.
3.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
4.
Escutcheons.
B.
Welding certificates.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7
A.
COORDINATION
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
15053 - 2
LK 13534
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
according to ASTM B 813.
15053 - 3
Include water-flushable flux
LK 13534
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for
refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.4
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one
solvent-cement-joint end.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Eslon Thermoplastics.
B.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11
equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cementjoint end.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Thompson Plastics, Inc.
C.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC four-part union. Include brass
end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
NIBCO INC.
b.
NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
2.5
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Eclipse, Inc.
d.
Epco Sales, Inc.
e.
Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
15053 - 4
LK 13534
D.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Epco Sales, Inc.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E.
Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include
flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene
bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Central Plastics Company.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F.
Dielectric Couplings:
Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Calpico, Inc.
b.
Lochinvar Corp.
G.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at
225 deg F.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Perfection Corp.
b.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d.
Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
welded longitudinal joint.
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
15053 - 5
LK 13534
F.
2.7
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chromeplated finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8
A.
GROUT
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
1.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
15053 - 6
LK 13534
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
1.
New Piping:
a.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deeppattern type.
b.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chromeplated finish.
c.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
g.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
h.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
i.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floorplate type.
M.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete
floor and roof slabs.
15053 - 7
LK 13534
P.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend castiron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
2.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsumboard partitions.
c.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section
of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1)
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and
location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and
installation.
Q.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2.
Installll cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
R.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for
1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
1.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
S.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
T.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
15053 - 8
LK 13534
U.
3.2
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for
roughing-in requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
3.3
A.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
15053 - 9
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting
heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9
Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6
A.
CONCRETE BASES
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
3.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
5.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
15053 - 10
LK 13534
7.
3.7
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed
to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.9
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
15053 - 11
LK 13534
SECTION 15058
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, generalpurpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac
power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or
shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are
specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2
A.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
above sea level.
15058 - 1
LK 13534
B.
2.3
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
2.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
H.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I.
Insulation: Class F.
J.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for
motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
L.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers:
Match wiring
connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in
motor terminal box, suited to control method.
M.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and
features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,
designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time
rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F
insulation.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
15058 - 2
LK 13534
4.
N.
2.4
A.
Thermal Protection:
protected motors.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split phase.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating
of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
15058 - 3
LK 13534
SECTION 15062
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for
trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-protection
piping.
Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
Division 15 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe
guides and anchors.
Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and
supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers
and Supports."
15062 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show
fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.6
A.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Powder-actuated fastener systems.
Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
15062 - 2
LK 13534
1.
2.
2.2
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer
to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger
and support types.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Empire Industries, Inc.
3.
Grinnell Corp.
C.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for
support of bearing surface of piping.
2.3
A.
2.4
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly
made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel
channels and other components.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
15062 - 3
LK 13534
2.5
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in
sheet metal shield.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
PHS Industries, Inc.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference
of pipe.
F.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.6
A.
FASTENER SYSTEMS
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland
cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
15062 - 4
LK 13534
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.7
Empire Industries, Inc.
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A.
Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured
corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or Vshaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
C.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
D.
MIRO Industries.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members,
and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
E.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
MIRO Industries.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
MIRO Industries.
Portable Pipe Hangers.
Base: Stainless steel.
Vertical Members:
Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,
continuous-thread rods.
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or
stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members,
and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
2.
3.
4.
Portable Pipe Hangers.
Bases: One or more plastic.
Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
15062 - 5
LK 13534
5.
F.
2.8
A.
2.9
Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from
structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent
stationary roof curb.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Description:
Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from
structural-steel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F
pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
15062 - 6
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
G.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension
of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of
insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to
allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension
of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11):
For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt
to retain pipe.
Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support
for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30,
from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might
occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2
to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8):
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
15062 - 7
For support of pipe risers,
LK 13534
2.
H.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy
loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping
installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
15062 - 8
LK 13534
J.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
K.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and loadadjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a.
b.
c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
L.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
M.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
N.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction. Verify type with structural
engineer prior to work.
15062 - 9
LK 13534
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from building structure.
B.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified
above for individual pipe hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
F.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating
manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Pipe Stand Installation:
1.
2.
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and
mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand
and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
G.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
H.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
15062 - 10
LK 13534
J.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts
before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through
openings at top of inserts.
L.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9
(for building services piping) are not exceeded.
N.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
6.
7.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping
and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
15062 - 11
LK 13534
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting:
surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4
Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 2 inches.
3.6
A.
PAINTING
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for
shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted
surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
15062 - 12
LK 13534
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
15062 - 13
LK 13534
SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.3
Isolation pads.
Isolation mounts.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
Housed spring mounts.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
Pipe riser resilient supports.
Resilient pipe guides.
Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
Restraining braces and cables.
Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
IBC: International Building Code.
B.
ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C.
OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of
California.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration
isolation device.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
15074 - 1
LK 13534
a.
b.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports
and seismic restraints.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
California Dynamics Corporation.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Isolation.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
15074 - 2
LK 13534
B.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel base plates, and
factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1.
C.
Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed
compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled,
encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with base plate for bolting to
structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
2.
D.
2.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal
operation.
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard
for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal
operation.
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard
for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.
1.
E.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Base Plates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,
rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Base plates shall limit floor
load to 500 psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or
limit-stop restraint.
1.
2.
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due
to weight being removed; factory-drilled base plate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,
neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to base plate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
15074 - 3
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1.
2.
3.
Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or
down before contacting a resilient collar.
H.
Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant
elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for
hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring
and insert in compression.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
J.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomericinsert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
15074 - 4
LK 13534
8.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
K.
Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2
steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and
neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.
Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal
resistance in all directions.
L.
Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances
are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical
motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be
removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be
capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.2
A.
RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
California Dynamics Corporation.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries.
Thybar Corporation.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Isolation.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B.
General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factoryassembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently
support equipment and to withstand wind forces.
C.
Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and
removable steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide
continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind forces.
Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a
wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2
inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.
D.
Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inchthick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level
adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall
be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the
installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.
15074 - 5
LK 13534
1.
Restrained Spring Isolators:
restraint.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed
height of the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated
load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
without deformation or failure.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform
loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel
baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported
equipment.
a.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene.
E.
Snubber Bushings:
thick.
F.
Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper
support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and
counterflashed over roof materials.
2.3
All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
equipment before shipping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Powder coating on springs and housings.
All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind-control devices to
indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
15074 - 6
LK 13534
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLICATIONS
A.
Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for
application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on
Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due
to seismic forces.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.3
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of
roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building
structure.
C.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
D.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are
attached to wall.
E.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to
structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete
members.
F.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed
tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the
structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
15074 - 7
LK 13534
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior
to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom
of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid
introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for
exterior applications.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
Measure isolator deflection.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal
operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are
out of contact during normal operation.
C.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
15074 - 8
LK 13534
3.6
A.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 1
Section "Demonstration and Training."
HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE
1.
See schedule on drawings
END OF SECTION
15074 - 9
LK 13534
SECTION 15077
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
Duct labels.
Valve tags.
Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
15077 - 1
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
EQUIPMENT LABELS
Metal Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch or Aluminum, 0.032-inch
minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: Yellow.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
C.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus
the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment
schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
15077 - 2
LK 13534
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Letter Color: White.
C.
Background Color: Red.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with
lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels:
Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels:
backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations
or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
Flow-Direction Arrows:
Integral with piping system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches.
15077 - 3
LK 13534
2.4
DUCT LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Letter Color: White.
C.
Background Color: Blue.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
2.5
A.
VALVE TAGS
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation
and 1/2-inch numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Flow-Direction Arrows:
Integral with duct system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate
flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches.
Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch or Aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum
thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of
valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and
variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special
uses.
1.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
15077 - 4
LK 13534
2.6
A.
WARNING TAGS
Warning Tags:
Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of
plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or
"DO NOT OPERATE."
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Piping Color-Coding:
Painting."
B.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "Interior
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
15077 - 5
LK 13534
C.
3.4
A.
Pipe Label Color Schedule: See Schedule on Drawings.
DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following
color codes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.5
Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.
Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable
ceiling system.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves;
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience
and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughingin connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color
scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
3.6
A.
1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches, round.
2.
Valve-Tag Color: Natural.
3.
Letter Color: Black.
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
END OF SECTION
15077 - 6
LK 13534
SECTION 15082
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
Mineral fiber.
2.
Insulating cements.
3.
Adhesives.
4.
Mastics.
5.
Lagging adhesives.
6.
Sealants.
7.
Factory-applied jackets.
8.
Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9.
Field-applied cloths.
10.
Tapes.
11.
Securements.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 15 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."
2.
Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for
each type of insulation and hanger.
2.
Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of
insulation.
3.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and
specialties for each type of insulation.
4.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
5.
Detail field application for each equipment type.
15082 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have
fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
1.7
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with
appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields
specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before
preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements
for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space
required for maintenance.
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where
required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may
begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating
materials shall be applied.
15082 - 2
LK 13534
2.2
2.3
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as
acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c.
Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with
factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
B.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c.
Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates
and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
15082 - 3
LK 13534
2.
2.4
2.5
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;
comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient
services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35.
c.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.
d.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501.
e.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film
thickness.
3.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
4.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by
weight.
5.
Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible
with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
c.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
d.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
e.
Vimasco Corporation; 136.
2.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors
to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
4.
Color: White.
15082 - 4
LK 13534
2.6
2.7
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
B.
ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
2.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
3.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5.
Color: White.
6.
For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
2.8
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A.
2.9
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various
applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the
following:
1.
ASJ-SSL:
ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1)
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder
Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a
thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe
fittings.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave,
and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
15082 - 5
LK 13534
a.
2.10
Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW,
Luben 59.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division;
Fasson 0835.
b.
Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF
ASJ.
d.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW
Plus/SQ.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5.
Elongation: 2 percent.
6.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with
acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division;
Fasson 0555.
b.
Compac Corp.; 130.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White
PVC tape.
d.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2.
Width: 2 inches.
3.
Thickness: 6 mils.
4.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5.
Elongation: 500 percent.
6.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
C.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division;
Fasson 0800.
b.
Compac Corp.; 120.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2.
Width: 2 inches.
3.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
15082 - 6
LK 13534
5.
6.
2.11
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
Childers Products; Bands.
b.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or
Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14,
0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
4.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and
slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer
for application.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless
steel or Monel.
C.
Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
C & F Wire.
b.
Childers Products.
c.
PABCO Metals Corporation.
d.
RPR Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and
are free of defects.
2.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
15082 - 7
LK 13534
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and
even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier
mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to
point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to
structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation.
Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture
by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended
coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
15082 - 8
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching
staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation
with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along
edge at 4 inches o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over
staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent
of its nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations
and cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over
damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas.
Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
Vibration-control devices.
2.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
3.
Nameplates and data plates.
4.
Manholes.
5.
Handholes.
6.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not
Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
C.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
15082 - 9
LK 13534
3.5
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except
where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation
material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings
made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each
piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with
adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform
with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut
sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and
hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box
studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate
strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket.
Provide a
removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services,
provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times
the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker.
7.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and
coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services
and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic
with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and wellshaped contour.
8.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
15082 - 10
LK 13534
3.6
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure
temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and
transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at
these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall
conform to the following:
1.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe
insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same
insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation,
extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the
insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange
or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for
flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of
valve body.
4.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each
consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this
wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend
insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of
valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with
insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
5.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish
exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands
and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints,
and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces,
secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do
not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
15082 - 11
LK 13534
3.
4.
3.7
3.8
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber
blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install
mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of
pipe insulation to valve body.
3.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
4.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FINISHES
A.
Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in
Division 9 painting Sections.
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with
jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric
mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency:
inspections.
Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
15082 - 12
LK 13534
1.
2.
D.
3.9
3.10
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of
their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s)
for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate
to determine compliance.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by
Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in
reverse order of their installation.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection
reveals noncompliance with requirements.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are
identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material
is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the
following:
1.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2.
Underground piping.
3.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel
injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Domestic Cold Water:
1.
See drawing sheet P1.00 for insulation schedule.
B.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1.
See drawing sheet P1.00 for insulation schedule.
C.
Stormwater and Overflow:
1.
See drawing sheet P1.00 for insulation schedule.
D.
Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:
1.
See drawing sheet P1.00 for insulation schedule.
END OF SECTION
15082 - 13
LK 13534
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
Cellular glass.
b.
Flexible elastomeric.
c.
Mineral fiber.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Fire-rated insulation systems.
Insulating cements.
Adhesives.
Mastics.
Lagging adhesives.
Sealants.
Factory-applied jackets.
Field-applied jackets.
Tapes.
Securements.
Corner angles.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
2.
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
15083 - 1
LK 13534
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and
access panels.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
Detail field application for each equipment type.
Sample Sizes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.
Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.
Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show
the full range of colors available for each type of finish material.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of
insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements
indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have firetest-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
1.5
A.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with
appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
15083 - 2
LK 13534
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for
equipment insulation application.
Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation
and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments
that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in
each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials
shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F.
Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed,
rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
15083 - 3
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL:
Comply with
ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factoryapplied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "FactoryApplied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
I.
CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded
with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied
jacket.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
J.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas.
Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
15083 - 4
LK 13534
d.
e.
f.
K.
High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with
a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied
jacket.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
L.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
A.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
Type II, 1200 deg F Materials:
Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factoryapplied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "FactoryApplied Jackets" Article.
FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
Fire-Rated Board:
Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate,
fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with
ASTM C 656, Type II, Grade 6. tested and certified to provide a [1] [2]-hour fire rating
by a NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
B.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas.
Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.
Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board.
Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.
Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
2.2
Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M.
Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that
is tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction.
15083 - 5
LK 13534
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
A.
INSULATING CEMENTS
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
Products:
following]:
a.
b.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement:
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1.
Comply with
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.
Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.
Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.
3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.
Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
15083 - 6
LK 13534
D.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.5
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE
Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
Solvent
Welding
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply
with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient
services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
A.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
15083 - 7
LK 13534
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
A.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to
adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
Joint Sealants:
1.
Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products:
requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Subject to compliance with
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
Vimasco Corporation; 750.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
Vimasco Corporation; 136.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Vimasco Corporation; 750.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
15083 - 8
LK 13534
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.9
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and
forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
Color: White.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field
fabricate.
a.
5.
D.
Johns Manville; Zeston.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical
joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
Metal Jacket:
15083 - 9
LK 13534
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications:
1-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
E.
Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of
a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with
stucco-embossed aluminum-foil facing.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
2.10
A.
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
Tee covers.
Flange and union covers.
End caps.
Beveled collars.
Valve covers.
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are
not available.
Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.
TAPES
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
15083 - 10
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.11
A.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corp.; 120.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Bands:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Childers Products; Bands.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
15083 - 11
LK 13534
3.
4.
B.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed
for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel
pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized
carbon-steel washer.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
GEMCO; CD.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by
2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive:
Recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
15083 - 12
LK 13534
4.
Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
b.
c.
d.
5.
Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in
diameter.
Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
Adhesive:
Recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
6.
GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
GEMCO; R-150.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel
insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from
0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
GEMCO.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
C.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
D.
Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
15083 - 13
LK 13534
a.
b.
c.
d.
C & F Wire.
Childers Products.
PABCO Metals Corporation.
RPR Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free
of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating,
apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick
and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140
and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials
and application methods for operating temperature range.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32
and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature
range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
A.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and
piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
15083 - 14
LK 13534
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket
in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate
and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive selfsealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches
o.c.
15083 - 15
LK 13534
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged
areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and
seal patches similar to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
A.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation
flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
Install insulation
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
15083 - 16
LK 13534
3.
4.
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing
at least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate
insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct
insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
F.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire
rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match
adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2
inches.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where
more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation
articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise
indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made
from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be
butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,
seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,
hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe
insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie
wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
15083 - 17
LK 13534
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to
and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket
flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below
ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat
with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a
breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabricreinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible
elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,
valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC
covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure
temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on
insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by
tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing
cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of
same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as
adjoining pipe insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange
cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges
except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting
of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or
15083 - 18
LK 13534
5.
3.6
A.
CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.
4.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellularglass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
C.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections
of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
15083 - 19
LK 13534
3.7
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
3.8
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation
when available.
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing
and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
15083 - 20
LK 13534
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums:
insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
Secure with adhesive and
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a.
b.
c.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches
o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install
additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
15083 - 21
LK 13534
d.
e.
f.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of
insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch
outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factoryor field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at
18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied
in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width
equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end
joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches
o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows
with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches
o.c.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums:
insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
Secure with adhesive and
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a.
b.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches
o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install
additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
15083 - 22
LK 13534
c.
d.
e.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of
insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch
outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factoryor field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
5.
6.
3.9
A.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at
18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied
in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width
equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as
possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and
flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches
o.c.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or
insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint
strips at end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
15083 - 23
LK 13534
C.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and
bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
D.
3.10
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap
and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct
hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B.
Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C.
Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems
are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.11
A.
FINISHES
Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9
painting Sections.
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two
coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.12
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
15083 - 24
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.13
A.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection
reveals noncompliance with requirements.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the
"Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment
defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,
remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their
installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight
pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two
locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations
of threaded valves, and threelocations of flanged valves for each pipe service
defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.
Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.
Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building
exterior.
Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building
exterior.
Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
15083 - 25
LK 13534
3.14
A.
3.15
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
Refer to “Duct Material and Insulation” Schedule on Drawings:
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are
identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is
listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated:
following:
1.
2.
3.
3.16
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Refer to piping material and insulation schedule on drawings:
END OF SECTION
15083 - 26
LK 13534
SECTION 15092
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Section Includes:
1.
Sleeves.
2.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
3.
Sleeve-seal systems.
4.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
5.
Grout.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends
and welded steel collar; zinc coated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves:
ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube
closed with welded longitudinal joint.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer
surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
15092 - 1
Type E,
Grade B,
LK 13534
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
2.
Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
B.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.
CALPICO, Inc.
3.
Metraflex Company (The).
4.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5.
Proco Products, Inc.
B.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling
annular space between piping and sleeve.
1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit
surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and
size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Stainless steel.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant
coating, Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Presealed Systems.
B.
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for
imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar
with center opening to match piping OD.
GROUT
A.
Standard:
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volumeadjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
15092 - 2
LK 13534
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs,
and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size
large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete
slabs and walls.
1.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new
slabs and walls are constructed.
1.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by moldedPE or -PP sleeves.
2.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical
equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor
level.
3.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without
sleeve-seal system.
D.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply
with requirements for sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
E.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,
ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop
materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7
Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1.
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
15092 - 3
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors
with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing
specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above
finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "ThroughPenetration Firestop Systems."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-ongrade at service piping entries into building.
B.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material
and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve.
Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and
install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight
seal.
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete
slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or
wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves, Galvanizedsteel wall sleeves, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or Sleeve-seal
fittings.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves, Galvanizedsteel wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
15092 - 4
LK 13534
a.
3.
4.
5.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with
sleeve-seal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal
system.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with
sleeve-seal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal
system.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with
sleeve-seal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal
system.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with
sleeve-seal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal
system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Stack-sleeve fittings.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Stack-sleeve fittings.
Interior Partitions:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION
15092 - 5
LK 13534
SECTION 15097
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Section Includes:
1.
Escutcheons.
2.
Floor plates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chromeplated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
B.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type:
fasteners.
C.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, hinge, and springclip fasteners.
With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip
FLOOR PLATES
A.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange.
B.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
15097 - 1
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of
insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece,
deep-pattern type.
b.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, type with polished, chromeplated finish.
c.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
One-piece, stamped-steel type.
2.
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
b.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposedrivet hinge.
c.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
e.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Splitcasting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
f.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Splitplate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
C.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping
and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
2.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION
15097 - 2
LK 13534
SECTION 15111
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1.
Bronze ball valves.
2.
Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.
3.
Bronze check valves.
4.
Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves.
5.
Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
6.
Bronze gate valves.
7.
Bronze globe valves.
8.
Automatic Flow-Control Valves.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site
construction piping.
2.
Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
valve tags and charts.
3.
Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those
Sections only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
2.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4.
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
5.
TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
15111 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
1.6
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim
materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end
connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list
indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves:
dimension and design criteria.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for
B.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
Maintain valve end protection.
2.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground
in watertight enclosures.
B.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do
not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the
following requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by the manufacturers specified.
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B.
Bronze Valves:
indicated.
NPS 2 and smaller with soldered ends, unless otherwise
15111 - 2
LK 13534
2.3
C.
Ferrous Valves:
indicated.
NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise
D.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as
required for system pressures and temperatures.
E.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Valve Actuators:
1.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
2.
Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.
3.
Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1
wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G.
Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H.
Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves,
and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I.
Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
1.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
a.
Caution:
Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F
(454 deg C) for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421
deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves.
2.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
J.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Hammond Valve.
f.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
Red-White Valve Corp.
i.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
j.
Apollo.
2.
Three-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Red-White Valve Corp.
e.
Apollo.
15111 - 3
LK 13534
2.4
2.5
C.
Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
D.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and
blowout-proof stem.
E.
Three-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated
bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating
and blowout-proof stem.
FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Flanged, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a.
Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div.
b.
Grinnell Corporation.
c.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
C.
Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff,
with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Flanged, 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
Flanged-end type with one- or two-piece stem.
BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Walworth Co.
2.
Type 1, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Red-White Valve Corp.
3.
Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a.
Grinnell Corporation.
b.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
4.
Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
15111 - 4
LK 13534
5.
2.6
2.7
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Grinnell Corporation.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
Red-White Valve Corp.
j.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Grinnell Corporation.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
Red-White Valve Corp.
j.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C.
Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
D.
Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves:
nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.
Bronze body with
E.
Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves:
nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.
Bronze body with
F.
Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc
and seat.
FERROUS-ALLOY WAFER CHECK VALVES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Dual-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged-Type Check Valves:
a.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b.
Gulf Valve Co.
c.
Techno Corp.
C.
Dual-Plate, Class 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flangedend body.
SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves:
15111 - 5
LK 13534
2.
3.
2.8
a.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a.
Grinnell Corporation.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
d.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
e.
NIBCO INC.
Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a.
Grinnell Corporation.
b.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
c.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
d.
NIBCO INC.
e.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C.
Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy
disc and bronze or alloy seat.
D.
Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
bronze shell and flanged ends.
Threaded style with
BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Grinnell Corporation.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
Red-White Valve Corp.
2.
Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e.
Grinnell Corporation.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
Red-White Valve Corp.
B.
Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C.
Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and
union-ring bonnet.
15111 - 6
LK 13534
2.9
AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES – AFCV-1:
1.
Automatic Flow Control Valves shall be Hays Fluid Controls, Y-ball
Measurflo 2514, NPS ¾ with integral ball valve with lever handle. Factory
preset to flow rates indicated on drawings.
2.
Automatic flow control valves shall automatically control the flow to within
10% of the rated value, over a 40 to 1 differential pressure, operating
range, (2 to 80 PSID). Operational temperature shall be rated from fluid
freezing, to 225 degree F.
3.
All valves shall be marked per MMS-SP-25-78 (1983) and shall show as a
minimum; controlled flow direction, flow rate, PSID control range,
manufacturer and model number.
4.
Manufacturer shall provide certified independent laboratory tests verifying
accuracy of performance.
5.
Dual pressure/temperature test ports for verifying the pressure differential
and system temperature shall be standard.
6.
Valve internal control mechanism shall be of a quiet, clog resistant design
and consist of one or more, precision sculptured brass or
polyphenylsulfone orifi with high temperature elastomeric diaphragm.
Each automatic balancing valve will automatically control the flow rate
within 10% of its rated flow, over a temperature range of 32 to 225 degree
F, and a pressure differential range of 2-80 PSID.
7.
Threaded fittings ¾ inch shall be suitable for 600 PSIG. Working
Pressure Rating per ASTM A53B for threaded joint type extra weight, of
the pipe size indicated. (For most Building Services applications, ANSI
Class 125 rating.) Flow rates from .5 to 24.0 GPM will have a differential
pressure operating range of 2 to 80 PSID. Flow rates shall be field
changeable without breaking the piping connections.
8.
Copper Sweat fittings ¾ inch shall be suitable for 522 PSIG. Working
Pressure Rating per ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent
disc movement during shipping and handling.
C.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and
seats made accessible by such operations.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
15111 - 7
LK 13534
3.2
3.3
E.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check
bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size,
that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects
and damage.
F.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are
not indicated, use the following:
1.
Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
2.
Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3.
Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1.
Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Two or Three-piece, 600-psig
(4140-kPa> CWP rating, bronze.
2.
Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Three-piece, 600-psig (4140kPa> CWP rating, bronze.
3.
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged, 300-psig
(2070-kPa) CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner.
4.
Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150,
horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150,
bronze.
6.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 250,
gray iron.
7.
Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dual-plate, doubleflanged, Class 150, ferrous alloy.
8.
Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
Type IV, Class 150.
9.
Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
Type I or II, Class 250, cast iron.
D.
Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end
connections:
1.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder-joint.
2.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 and larger (DN 65 to DN 100): Solder
joint for ball valves ends. Flanged ends for other types of valves.
3.
For Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: Valve ends may be grooved.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
15111 - 8
LK 13534
3.4
3.5
B.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1.
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2.
Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32,
lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put
into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent
leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION
15111 - 9
LK 13534
SECTION 15122
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Thermometers
2.
Pressure Gages
3.
Water Meters
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 15 Plumbing Equipment Sections that specify meters and gages
as part of factory-fabricated equipment.
REFERENCES
A.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1.
B40.100 “Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments”
2.
B40.5 “Snubbers”
B.
ASTM International (ASTM) Publications:
1.
E1-03a“Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: for each type of product indicated.
B.
Maintenance Data: for each type of product indicated to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
.
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
a.
Ashcroft, Inc.
b.
Marsh Bellofram
c.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
d.
Trerice, H. O. Co
2.
Pressure Gages:
a.
Ashcroft, Inc.
b.
Marsh Bellofram
c.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
d.
Trerice, H. O. Co
3.
Water Meters:
a.
Reference Civil drawings and specifications.
15122 - 1
LK 13534
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A.
Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
1.
Domestic Hot and Cold Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale
divisions.
B.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
THERMOMETERS - LIQUID-IN-GLASS
A.
Description: ASTM E1-03a.
B.
Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front,
spring secured, 9 inches long.
C.
Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,
360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D.
Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled with magnifying lens.
E.
Scale: Satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F.
Stem: Brass for separable socket; of length to suit installation.
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Description: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom
connection; dry type, unless liquid-filled-case type is indicated.
B.
Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch- diameter, glass lens.
C.
Connector: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN8).
D.
Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F.
Range: Comply with the following:
1.
Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure (or 0 to 160
psi).
PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A.
Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN8) brass needle type with round knurled handle.
B.
Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN8) extended stem brass bushing with
corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and
working pressure.
15122 - 2
LK 13534
2.6
WATER METERS
A.
Refer to Civil drawings and specifications for water meters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - METER AND GAGE, GENERAL
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION - THERMOMETER
A.
Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B.
Install in the following locations:
1.
Domestic hot water storage tank outlet.
2.
Domestic hot water return main on suction side of pump.
3.
Outlet of primary thermostatic mixing valve.
4.
Domestic water heater discharge.
5.
Building domestic cold water service entrance.
INSTALLATION - PRESSURE-GAGE
A.
Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at
most readable position.
B.
Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
Upstream and downstream of each pressure-reducing valve.
2.
Building water-service entrance.
C.
Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
D.
Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
INSTALLATION - WATER METER
A.
3.5
Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written
instructions for applications where used.
Install water meter per Civil drawings and specifications.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:
1.
Install meters and gages adjacent to equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
B.
Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and
devices.
15122 - 3
LK 13534
3.6
C.
Ground electrically operated meters.
1.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D.
Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E.
Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after
installation.
B.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C.
Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces.
Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces
with manufacturer's touchup paint.
END OF SECTION
15122 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes,
fittings, and specialties inside the building.
2.
Encasement for piping.
3.
Specialty valves.
4.
Flexible connectors.
5.
Water meters furnished by utility company.
6.
Water meters for installation by Contractor.
B.
Related Section:
1.
Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping and water
meters (water meters specified by Civil Engineer) outside the building
from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall
withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following products:
1.
Specialty valves.
2.
Dielectric fittings.
3.
Flexible connectors.
4.
Water meters.
5.
Backflow preventers
6.
Vacuum breakers
B.
Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
15140 - 1
LK 13534
1.5
1.6
C.
Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested
areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1.
Fire-suppression-water piping.
2.
Domestic water piping.
3.
HVAC hydronic piping.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and
components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping. Comply with NSF 61 for
potable domestic water piping and components.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment
provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations,
and pipe sizes.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
1.
Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
2.
Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper
pressure fittings.
3.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
4.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body,
with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or
threaded ends.
5.
Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.
2)
NIBCO INC.
3)
Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
15140 - 2
LK 13534
b.
6.
B.
2.3
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.
1.
Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure
fittings.
2.
Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.
2)
NIBCO INC.
3)
Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber Oring seal in each end.
c.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with
EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
2.4
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber Oring seal in each end.
c.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with
EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
Grooved-Joint Copper-Tube Appurtenances:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Anvil International.
2)
Shurjoint Piping Products.
3)
Victaulic Company.
b.
Copper Grooved-End Fittings:
ASTM B 75 copper tube or
ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
c.
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings:
Copper-tube dimensions and
design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts
and nuts.
PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing.
1.
Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or
stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions.
2.
Manifold: Multiple-outlet, corrosion resistant copper tube assembly
complying with ASTM F 877; without valves.
3.
PEX Tubing only allowed in guestrooms for individual fixture piping. No
joints or splices allowed between PEX manifold and fixture connection.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; fullface or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts:
otherwise indicated.
15140 - 3
ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
LK 13534
2.5
2.6
2.7
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys
for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A.
Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B.
Form: Tube.
C.
Material:
thickness.
D.
Color: Black.
High-density, cross-laminated PE film of 0.004-inch] minimum
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum
breakers.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements:
1.
Same size as pipes to be joined.
2.
Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3.
End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings:
piping system fitting.
C.
Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.
b.
Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.
c.
Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
d.
JCM Industries.
e.
Romac Industries, Inc.
f.
Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company.
g.
Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.
15140 - 4
Manufactured piping coupling or specified
LK 13534
2.8
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with
separating nonconductive insulating material.
Include end connections
compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
c.
Jomar International Ltd.
d.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
e.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
f.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
g.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
b.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
c.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
c.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
d.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
b.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
d.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;
threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Central Plastics Company.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E.
Dielectric Nipples:
15140 - 5
LK 13534
1.
2.
2.9
2.10
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Elster Perfection.
b.
Grinnell Mechanical Products.
c.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
d.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
e.
Victaulic Company.
Description:
a.
Standard: IAPMO PS 66
b.
Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545.
c.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F
d.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
e.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
2.
Flexicraft Industries.
3.
Flex Pression, Ltd.
4.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
5.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6.
Mercer Rubber Co.
7.
Metraflex, Inc.
8.
Proco Products, Inc.
9.
Tozen Corporation.
10.
Unaflex, Inc.
B.
Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wirebraid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1.
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2.
End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end
copper tube.
3.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
C.
Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing
with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1.
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2.
End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
WATER METERS
A.
Refer to Civil drawings and specifications for water meters.
15140 - 6
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
C.
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to
AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
D.
Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement
according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee
with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply
with requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping"
for pressure gages and Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for drain valves and strainers.
F.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
G.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves in front of
domestic water meter as required by local authority.
H.
Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward
drain.
I.
Install seismic restraints on piping as required. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
J.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
15140 - 7
LK 13534
3.3
K.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
L.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
M.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and
maintenance.
N.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
O.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same
as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless
otherwise indicated.
P.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Q.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
R.
Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
S.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment,
machine, and specialty.
T.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump
and at main service water riser where it enters the building. Comply with
requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for
pressure gages.
U.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve
Seals for Plumbing Piping."
V.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
W.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons
for Plumbing Piping."
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints:
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
15140 - 8
LK 13534
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
3.4
D.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join
copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
F.
Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools
recommended by fitting manufacturer.
G.
Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling
with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end
fittings according to AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in
size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with
gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
I.
PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
J.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "GeneralDuty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B.
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving
plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each
water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops.
C.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are
specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1.
Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and
branches.
2.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where
indicated.
D.
Install automatic flow control valve in each hot-water circulation return branch.
E.
Install circuit balancing valve at discharge side of each circulator. Set balancing
valve for total gpm indicated on drawings.
15140 - 9
LK 13534
3.5
3.6
3.7
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2.
NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and
tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or unions.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and
installation.
1.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c.
Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
3.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of
3/8 inch.
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
6.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
7.
NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
15140 - 10
LK 13534
3.8
3.9
3.10
F.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G.
Install hangers designed for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
H.
Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.
I.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and
maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend
and connect to the following:
1.
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
Comply with
requirements in Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections for connection
sizes.
3.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not
smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for
each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and
installation.
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Piping Inspections:
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been
inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
15140 - 11
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
3.11
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day
before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in
presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before
concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting
fixtures.
b.
Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure
compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not
pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for
reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities
having jurisdiction.
C.
Piping Tests:
1.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are
not air bound and that piping is full of water.
2.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram
of portion of piping tested.
3.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping
uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved.
Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
4.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system
materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks
and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
6.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide
adequate flow.
a.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation
return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
15140 - 12
LK 13534
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.12
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace
drain plugs.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as
specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and
operation.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in
either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described
below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water
does not appear at outlets.
b.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with
at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow
to stand for 24 hours.
2)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with
at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for
three hours.
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water
coming from system after the standing time.
d.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having
jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows
contamination.
B.
Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2.
Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if
methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water
does not appear at outlets.
b.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having
jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows
contamination.
C.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
D.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.
15140 - 13
LK 13534
3.13
3.14
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating
may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on
aboveground copper tubing.
D.
Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service pipingng:
1.
As required by Civil Engineer’s drawings and specifications.
E.
Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be:
1.
Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; or PEX tubing (no fittings below
grade).
F.
Aboveground domestic water piping:
1.
See plumbing drawing P1.00 for pipe material schedule.
VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not
indicated, the following requirements apply:
1.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball
valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2.
Balancing Duty: Use ball NPS 2 and smaller. Hot-Water Circulation
Piping, Balancing Duty: automatic flow control valves.
3.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B.
Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from
equipment.
END OF SECTION
15140 - 14
LK 13534
SECTION 15145
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1.
Vacuum breakers.
2.
Backflow preventers.
3.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
4.
Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
5.
Strainers.
6.
Outlet boxes.
7.
Wall hydrants.
8.
Ground hydrants.
9.
Post hydrants.
10.
Drain valves.
11.
Water hammer arresters.
12.
Air vents.
13.
Trap-seal primer valves.
14.
Trap-seal primer systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure
gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
2.
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
3.
Division 15 Section "Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in
domestic water piping.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 80 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
15145 - 1
LK 13534
1.5
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related
Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.
2.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects; Sections 1 through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Ames Co.
b.
Cash Acme.
c.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d.
FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e.
Rain Bird Corporation.
f.
Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
g.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1001.
4.
Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
5.
Body: Bronze.
6.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
B.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
15145 - 2
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.2
a.
Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b.
Cash Acme.
c.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d.
MIFAB, Inc.
e.
Prier Products, Inc.
f.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
Standard: ASSE 1011.
Body: Bronze, non-removable, with manual drain.
Outlet Connection:
Garden-hose threaded complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
Pressure Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Ames Co.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c.
FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d.
Flomatic Corporation.
e.
Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
f.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4.
Standard: ASSE 1020.
5.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
6.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
7.
Accessories:
a.
Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c.
FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1012.
4.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
5.
Size: NPS 1/2.
15145 - 3
LK 13534
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.3
Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers :
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1022.
4.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
5.
Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.
6.
Body: Stainless steel.
7.
End Connections: Threaded.
WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A.
2.4
Body: Bronze.
End Connections: Union, solder joint.
Finish: Rough bronze.
Water Regulators:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c.
Honeywell Water Controls.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1003.
4.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
5.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2
through NPS 4.
6.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 21/2 through NPS 4.
TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A.
Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Holby Valve Company.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1017.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
4.
Type: Exposed-mounting, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.
15145 - 4
LK 13534
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
2.5
Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
b.
Leonard Valve Company.
c.
Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
5.
Temperature Control: Adjustable.
6.
Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
7.
Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.
8.
Tempered-Water Setting: 110 deg. F.
STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A.
2.6
Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.
Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and coldwater supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.
Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
Tempered-Water Setting: 120 deg F.
Valve Finish: Rough bronze.
Piping Finish: Copper.
Y-Pattern Strainers <Insert drawing designation if any>:
1.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for
NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 21/2 and larger.
4.
Screen:
Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise
indicated.
5.
Perforation Size:
a.
StrainersNPS 2 and Smaller: 0.062 inch.
b.
Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.125 inch.
c.
Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.25 inch.
6.
Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Clothes Washer Outlet Box:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
15145 - 5
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
2.7
a.
Acorn Engineering Company.
b.
Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c.
IPS Corporation.
d.
LSP Products Group, Inc.
e.
Oatey.
f.
Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
g.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
h.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
i.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
Mounting: Recessed.
Material and Finish: epoxy-painted-steel or plastic box and faceplate.
Faucet: Combination, valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water,
valved fittings complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose
thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.
Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2
copper, water tubing.
Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to
drainage piping.
Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer inlet
hoses with female, garden-hose-thread couplings.
Include rubber
washers.
Drain Hose: One 48-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer drain
hose with hooked end.
Icemaker Outlet Boxes:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Acorn Engineering Company.
b.
IPS Corporation.
c.
LSP Products Group, Inc.
d.
Oatey.
e.
Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
3.
Mounting: Recessed.
4.
Material and Finish: Plastic box and faceplate.
5.
Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2
or smaller copper tube outlet.
6.
Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2
copper, water tubing.
WALL HYDRANTS
A.
Non-freeze Wall Hydrants:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
15145 - 6
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2.8
a.
Josam Company.
b.
Prier Products, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
e.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed outlet, self-draining wall
hydrants.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
Operation: Loose key.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness.
Include wall clamp.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.
Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread
complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread
complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Rough bronze.
Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.
GROUND HYDRANTS
A.
Non-freeze Ground Hydrants:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
Murdock, Inc.
c.
Prier Products, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
3.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M.
4.
Type: Non-freeze, concealed-outlet ground hydrant with box.
5.
Operation: Loose key.
6.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of at least length required for burial of valve
below frost line.
7.
Inlet: NPS 3/4.
8.
Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
9.
Drain: Designed with hole to drain into ground when shut off.
10.
Box: Standard pattern with cover.
11.
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
12.
Operating Key(s): Two with each ground hydrant.
13.
Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1011.
15145 - 7
LK 13534
2.9
POST HYDRANTS
A.
2.10
DRAIN VALVES
A.
2.11
Non-freeze, Draining-Type Post Hydrants:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
MIFAB, Inc.
b.
Prier Products, Inc.
c.
Simmons Manufacturing Co.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M.
4.
Type: Non-freeze, exposed-outlet post hydrant.
5.
Operation: Loose key.
6.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of at least length required for burial of valve
below frost line.
7.
Casing: Bronze with casing guard.
8.
Inlet: NPS 3/4.
9.
Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
10.
Drain: Designed with hole to drain into ground when shut off.
11.
Vacuum Breaker: Non-removable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum
breaker complying with ASSE 1011; and garden-hose thread complying
with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
12.
Operating Key(s): Two with each loose-key-operation wall hydrant.
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: Copper alloy.
5.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A.
Water Hammer Arresters:
15145 - 8
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.12
AIR VENTS
A.
2.13
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Josam Company.
c.
MIFAB, Inc.
d.
PPP Inc.
e.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
Type: Copper tube with piston.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A
through F.
Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1.
Body: Bronze.
2.
Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.
3.
Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4.
Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5.
Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.
6.
Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A.
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
MIFAB, Inc.
b.
PPP Inc.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1018.
4.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
5.
Body: Bronze.
6.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
7.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
8.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube
that is not chrome finished.
15145 - 9
LK 13534
B.
2.14
Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap
makeup connection.
4.
Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.
5.
Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
A.
Trap-Seal Primer Systems:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
PPP Inc.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1044,
4.
Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing.
5.
Cabinet: Surface-mounting steel box with stainless-steel cover.
6.
Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for
120-V ac power.
7.
Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
8.
Number Outlets: See drawings.
9.
Size Outlets: NPS 1/2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and
systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of
contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or
system.
2.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain
connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive
pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to
floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow
preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
15145 - 10
LK 13534
3.2
C.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages
on inlet and outlet.
D.
Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure
gages on inlet and outlet.
E.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
F.
Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff
valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1.
Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as
specified.
G.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressurereducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.
H.
Install ground hydrants with 1 cu. yd. of crushed gravel around drain hole. Set
ground hydrants with box flush with grade.
I.
Install draining-type post hydrants with 1 cu. yd. of crushed gravel around drain
hole. Set post hydrants in concrete paving or in 1 cu. ft. of concrete block at
grade.
J.
Install nonfreeze, nondraining-type post hydrants set in concrete or pavement.
K.
Install freeze-resistant yard hydrants with riser pipe set in concrete or pavement.
Do not encase canister in concrete.
L.
Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
M.
Install air vents at high points of water piping.
N.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward
drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet
fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
O.
Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping
pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floordrain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
P.
Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap
a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
Adjust system for proper flow.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
15145 - 11
LK 13534
C.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1.
Pressure vacuum breakers.
2.
Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3.
Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4.
Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
5.
Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers.
6.
Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
7.
Reduced-pressure-detector,
fire-protection
backflow-preventer
assemblies.
8.
Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.
9.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
10.
Calibrated balancing valves.
11.
Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
12.
Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
13.
Primary water tempering valves.
14.
Outlet boxes.
15.
Hose stations.
16.
Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
17.
Trap-seal primer systems.
B.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1.
Test each backflow prevention device according to authorities having
jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest
as specified above.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B.
Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
15145 - 12
LK 13534
C.
Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing
valves.
END OF SECTION
15145 - 13
LK 13534
SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2.
Specialty pipe fittings.
3.
Encasement for underground metal piping.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for sanitary sewerage piping and
structures outside the building.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
B.
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation
shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
ASCE/SEI 7.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system.
sections, and details.
C.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based
on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2.
Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
15150 - 1
Include plans, elevations,
LK 13534
D.
1.5
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related
Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for
plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
2.3
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations,
and pipe sizes.
HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service weight classes.
B.
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C.
Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and
vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1.
Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1.
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
15150 - 2
LK 13534
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers"
2.4
ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A.
Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
B.
Material: high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum
thickness.
C.
Form: tube.
D.
Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTH MOVING
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other
design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
E.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
F.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
G.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
15150 - 3
LK 13534
I.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismicrestraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
J.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using
appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and shortsweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is
from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings
if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change
direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers
and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage
piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
K.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install
true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place
hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to
manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
L.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 4 and larger, or as indicated.
2.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent
stack.
M.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1.
Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105/A 21.5.
N.
Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
O.
Above ground PVC piping over public areas shall be insulated for sound
attenuation.
P.
Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Q.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains
connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow
piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 15
Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
2.
Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with
requirements for drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste
Piping Specialties."
15150 - 4
LK 13534
3.3
3.4
R.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
S.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve
Seals for Plumbing Piping."
T.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons
for Plumbing Piping."
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's
"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B.
Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining
surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,
and solvent cements.
2.
PVC Piping:
Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665
Appendixes.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 15
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation
specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
1.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive
environments.
2.
Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive
environments.
3.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive
environments.
4.
Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive
environments.
5.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
6.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
15150 - 5
LK 13534
7.
8.
3.5
3.6
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer:
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
MSS
C.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E.
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4.
NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
5.
NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
F.
Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping.
transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
4.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor
cleanouts with cover flush with floor.
5.
Comply with requirements for cleanouts drains specified in Division 15
Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
D.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance of equipment.
Use
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
15150 - 6
LK 13534
3.7
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Roughing-in Inspection:
Arrange for inspection of piping before
concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities
having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
2.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced
drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
3.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping
except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in
piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to
completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for
leaks.
4.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set
and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight
and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains
where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to
pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water
closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant
without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
6.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
15150 - 7
LK 13534
3.9
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D.
Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats
of water-based latex paint.
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be:
1.
See plumbing drawing P1.00 for pipe material schedule.
C.
Aboveground, vent piping shall be:
1.
See plumbing drawing P1.00 for pipe material schedule.
D.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be:
1.
Underground Grease Waste from kitchen; see plumbing drawing P1.00
for pipe material schedule.
2.
All other sanitary sewer; see plumbing drawing P1.00 for pipe material
schedule.
END OF SECTION
15150 - 8
LK 13534
SECTION 15155
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1.
Cleanouts.
2.
Floor drains.
3.
Roof flashing assemblies.
4.
Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
5.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
6.
Flashing materials.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains
for storm water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains,
and catch basins.
2.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for hair interceptors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D.
HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
E.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
15155 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:
1.
Grease interceptors.
2.
Oil interceptors.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent
terminals.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that grease
interceptors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined
in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based
on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified."
b.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic sanitary piping specialty components.
15155 - 2
LK 13534
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4.
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match
connected piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk brass plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than
cleanout size.
7.
Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
B.
Metal Floor Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
3.
Size: Same as connected branch.
4.
Type: Adjustable housing.
5.
Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
6.
Clamping Device: Required.
15155 - 3
LK 13534
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
C.
2.2
Outlet Connection: Inside calk, Spigot or Threaded.
Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze.
Frame and Cover Shape: Square.
Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser
to cleanout.
Standard: ASME A112.3.1.
Size: Same as connected branch.
Housing: Stainless steel.
Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4.
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match
connected piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk with brass plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than
cleanout size.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Prier Products, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Pattern: Floor drain.
3.
Body Material: Gray iron.
4.
Seepage Flange: Required.
5.
Anchor Flange: Required.
15155 - 4
LK 13534
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.3
2.4
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
Sediment Bucket: Not required.
Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron for heavy duty, Nickel bronze for
finished areas.
Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Gray iron for heavy duty, Nickel bronze
for finished areas.
Top Shape: Round for heavy duty, square for finished areas.
ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Roof Flashing Assemblies:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
b.
Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B.
Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch- thick,
lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with
galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
1.
Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
2.
Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3.
Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
ProSet Systems Inc.
3.
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping
plug.
4.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
5.
Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with
integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete
slabs.
6.
Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch
with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release
harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
7.
Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
15155 - 5
LK 13534
2.5
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings <Insert drawing designation if any>:
1.
Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet,
and trap-seal primer valve connection.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
B.
Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive
air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
2.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3.
Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4.
Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5.
Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for
associated indirect waste piping.
C.
Sleeve Flashing Device:
1.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that
forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include
galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend [1 inch] [2
inches] <Insert dimension> above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe
extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2.
Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
D.
Stack Flashing Fittings:
1.
Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending
vent pipe.
2.
Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
E.
Expansion Joints:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.
2.
Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3.
End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft..
2.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft..
B.
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper
content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include
G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
15155 - 6
LK 13534
C.
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40mil minimum thickness.
D.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material
being installed.
F.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
G.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.2
Anchor [grease interceptors] [grease removal devices] [and] [solids interceptors]
to concrete bases.
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 19-inch centers around full
perimeter of base.
2.
For installed equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
imbedded.
4.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
5.
Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
6.
Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are
specified in Division 3.
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and
100 feet for larger piping.
4.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
15155 - 7
LK 13534
C.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top
flush with finished floor.
D.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of
types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of
drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage
area radii:
a.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch total depression.
b.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but
not greater than 1-inch total depression.
3.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between
drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes
where penetrated.
4.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain,
unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that
extend through roof.
G.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend
through roof.
H.
Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at
floor penetrations.
I.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trapseal primer connection.
1.
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
J.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste
piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.
K.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
L.
Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion
joints for easy access and maintenance.
M.
Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
N.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes
unless trap is indicated.
15155 - 8
LK 13534
3.3
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawofftype unit.
D.
Grease Removal Devices: Connect controls, electrical power, factory-furnished
accessories, and inlet, outlet, and vent piping to unit.
E.
Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit;
flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction
piping to oil storage tank.
F.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required.
B.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or
embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of
10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches around sleeve.
3.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending
at least 8 inches around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or
commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
F.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or
secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G.
Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
15155 - 9
LK 13534
3.5
3.6
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1.
Grease interceptors.
2.
Grease removal devices.
3.
Oil interceptors.
B.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in
Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.7
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work
stops.
END OF SECTION
15155 - 10
LK 13534
SECTION 15160
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2.
Specialty pipe fittings.
3.
Encasement for underground metal piping.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage" for storm drainage piping outside the
building.
2.
Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps" for storm drainage pumps.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.
B.
Seismic Performance: Storm drainage piping and support and installation shall
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
ASCE/SEI 7.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based
on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
15160 - 1
LK 13349
1.5
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related
Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for
plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Storm-Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according
to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of storm-drainage service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of storm-drainage service without
Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
2.3
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations,
and pipe sizes.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and
vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1.
Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1.
Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Transition Couplings:
15160 - 2
LK 13349
1.
2.
3.
4.
General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small
differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections
same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or
specified-piping-system fitting.
Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
2)
Fernco Inc.
3)
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries,
Inc.
4)
Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate
Technologies, Inc.
b.
Standard: ASTM C 1173.
c.
Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition
pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension
band and tightening mechanism on each end.
d.
Sleeve Materials:
1)
For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
2)
For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or
ASTM D 5926, PVC.
3)
For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material
compatible with pipe materials being joined.
Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
2)
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries,
Inc.
b.
Standard: ASTM C 1460.
c.
Description:
Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,
corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTH MOVING
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other
15160 - 3
LK 13349
design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout
are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
E.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
F.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
G.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
I.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismicrestraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
J.
Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90
degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of
different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of
flow is prohibited.
K.
Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system.
Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to
manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
L.
Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
2.
Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of
flow.
M.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1.
Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105.
N.
Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
15160 - 4
LK 13349
3.3
3.4
O.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply
with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 15 Section
"Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
2.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains
connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.
Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm
drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts
specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
3.
Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.
Comply with
requirements for drains specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage
Piping Specialties."
P.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Q.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve
Seals for Plumbing Piping."
R.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
S.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons
for Plumbing Piping."
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to
CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B.
Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining
surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,
and solvent cements.
2.
ABS Piping:
Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661
Appendixes.
3.
PVC Piping:
Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665
Appendixes.
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Transition Couplings:
1.
Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in
OD's.
2.
In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
a.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.
15160 - 5
LK 13349
b.
3.5
NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 15
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation
specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
1.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive
environments.
2.
Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive
environments.
3.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive
environments.
4.
Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive
environments.
5.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
6.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion
rolls.
7.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
8.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch
minimum rods.
F.
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4.
NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
5.
NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
H.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
15160 - 6
LK 13349
3.6
3.7
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use
transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
1.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor
cleanouts with cover flush with floor.
2.
Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in
Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
D.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance of equipment.
E.
Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Identify exposed storm drainage piping.
Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Roughing-in Inspection:
Arrange for inspection of piping before
concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.
2.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
15160 - 7
LK 13349
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.9
3.10
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced
storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on
completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From
15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water
level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground storm drainage piping All sizes shall be:
1.
See plumbing drawing sheet P1.00 for pipe material schedule.
C.
Underground storm drainage piping All sizes shall be:
1.
See plumbing drawing sheet P1.00 for pipe material schedule.
END OF SECTION
15160 - 8
LK 13349
SECTION 15165
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Roof drains.
2.
Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
3.
Cleanouts.
4.
Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
5.
Flashing materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL ROOF DRAINS
A.
Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d.
Tyler Pipe.
e.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
15165 - 1
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.2
2.3
Body Material: Cast iron.
Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch diameter.
Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Extension Collars: As Required.
Underdeck Clamp: Required.
Expansion Joint: As Required.
Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
Dome Material: PE.
Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required.
Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required.
Water Dam: 2 inches high, on overflow drain only.
MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Downspout Adaptors:
1.
Description: Manufactured, gray-iron casting, for attaching to horizontaloutlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout.
2.
Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet.
B.
Downspout Boots :
1.
Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron casting, with
strap or ears for attaching to building; NPS 4 outlet; and shop-applied
bituminous coating.
2.
Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 outlet.
C.
Conductor Nozzles:
1.
Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with
mounting holes.
2.
Size: Same as connected conductor.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Floor Cleanouts:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
Oatey.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
e.
Tyler Pipe.
f.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products
Operation.
h.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for adjustable housing cleanouts.
3.
Size: Same as connected branch.
4.
Type: Adjustable housing.
5.
Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
15165 - 2
LK 13534
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
2.4
Wall Cleanouts:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d.
Tyler Pipe.
e.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4.
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match
connected piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk brass plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than
cleanout size.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
2.5
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet Connection: Inside calk, Spigot or Threaded.
Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze.
Frame and Cover Shape: Square.
Top-Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser
to cleanout.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
ProSet Systems Inc.
2.
Standard: ASTM E 814, for through-penetration firestop assemblies.
3.
Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service NA for throughpenetration firestop assemblies.
4.
Size: Same as connected pipe.
5.
Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with
integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete
slabs.
6.
Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch
with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release
harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
7.
Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft..
15165 - 3
LK 13534
B.
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper
content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include
G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C.
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40mil minimum thickness.
D.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material
being installed.
F.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane
manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in
Division 7 Sections.
1.
Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between
drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes
where penetrated.
2.
Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
3.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
B.
Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto
grade.
C.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following instructions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4
for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45
degrees.
3.
Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet <Insert dimension> for
piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.
4.
Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top
flush with finished floor.
E.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of
types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F.
Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.
15165 - 4
LK 13534
3.2
G.
Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors.
indicated.
H.
Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete
floor penetrations.
I.
Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
3.4
Install access door in wall if
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other
drainage shapes are required.
B.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or
embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum
length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around pipe.
2.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches around sleeve.
3.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending
at least 8 inches around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work
stops.
END OF SECTION
15165 - 5
LK 13534
SECTION 15183
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.
Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.
Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
Thermostatic expansion valves.
Solenoid valves.
Hot-gas bypass valves.
Filter dryers.
Strainers.
Pressure-regulating valves.
Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,
and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of
horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment
connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and
equipment.
1.
2.
Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.
Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and
design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe
and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation
15183 - 1
LK 13534
difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure
proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C.
Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping
interior and exterior are clean when installed.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join
copper socket fittings on copper pipe.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F.
Flexible Connectors:
15183 - 2
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
Operator: Rising stem.
Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Check Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straightthrough or angle pattern.
Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
Seat: Nylon.
End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Packed-Angle Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
End Connections: Socket ends.
Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7inch- long assembly.
Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.
End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Service Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
End Connections: Copper spring.
15183 - 3
LK 13534
5.
E.
Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
End Connections: Threaded.
Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
End Connections: Threaded.
Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.
Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Manual operator.
Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and
labeled by an NRTL.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
Superheat: Adjustable.
Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).
End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.
Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.
Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
Equalizer: Internal.
Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.
End Connections: Socket.
Set Pressure: Verify with supplied manufacturer.
Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
15183 - 4
LK 13534
I.
Straight-Type Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Angle-Type Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
K.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Body: Forged brass.
Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element
protected by filter screen.
Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
End Connections: Socket or flare.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
M.
Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
Screen: 100-mesh monel.
End Connections: Socket or flare.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1.
2.
L.
Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
End Connections: Socket or flare.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel
screws, and neoprene gaskets.
Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.
Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).
End Connections: Socket.
Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure
differential measurement.
Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
Rated Flow: 70.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Mufflers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
End Connections: Socket or flare.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
15183 - 5
LK 13534
N.
Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
O.
Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an
NRTL.
Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.
End Connections: Socket or threaded.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
End Connections: Socket or threaded.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
REFRIGERANTS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A
A.
Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications:
Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or
soldered joints.
B.
Suction Lines NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications:
Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or
soldered joints.
C.
Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper
fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.
D.
Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper
tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
15183 - 6
LK 13534
3.2
VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A.
Install packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.
B.
Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and
strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C.
Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the
compressor suction connection.
D.
Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet
side of filter dryers.
E.
Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.
F.
Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
G.
Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on
evaporators.
1.
2.
3.
Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
H.
Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
I.
Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion
valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
J.
Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished
as an integral assembly for device being protected:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Solenoid valves.
Thermostatic expansion valves.
Hot-gas bypass valves.
Compressor.
K.
Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion
valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.
L.
Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
M.
Install flexible connectors at compressors.
15183 - 7
LK 13534
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B.
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F.
Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
J.
Refer to Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of
Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.
K.
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,
and fittings.
L.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves
and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install
access doors or panels as specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames"
if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
M.
Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N.
Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to
mechanical injury.
O.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away
from compressor.
Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
15183 - 8
LK 13534
4.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
P.
When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove
valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties.
Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.
Q.
Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
R.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
S.
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or
between pipes for insulation installation.
T.
Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of fullthickness insulation.
U.
Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials and methods.
V.
Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
3.4
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or
welding, to prevent scale formation.
D.
Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter
"Pipe and Tube."
1.
2.
F.
Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with
copper pipe.
Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads.
15183 - 9
LK 13534
3.5
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers
and Supports."
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
3.6
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet
long.
Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact
with copper pipe.
at least at each floor. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size,
1/4 inch.
NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Support multifloor vertical runs
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers.
Isolate compressor,
condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not
rated above the test pressure.
Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less
than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a.
b.
Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout
duration of test.
15183 - 10
LK 13534
c.
d.
3.7
A.
SYSTEM CHARGING
Charge system using the following procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.8
Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small
amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If
vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B.
Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
C.
Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the
system design temperature.
D.
Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according
to manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and
bearings.
Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after
design flow rates and pressures are established.
END OF SECTION
15183 - 11
LK 13534
SECTION 15195
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Section Includes:
1.
Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2.
Piping specialties.
3.
Piping and tubing joining materials.
4.
Valves.
5.
Pressure regulators.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, spaces above ceilings, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors.
finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop
locations.
Examples include
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1.
Piping and Valves: 0.5 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Service Regulators: 0.5 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: As required by utility
company.
B.
Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: One pressure range of not more
than 0.5 psig.
C.
Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and
equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
15195 - 1
LK 13534
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
Piping specialties.
2.
Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3.
Valves.
Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
connection data of selected models.
4.
Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5.
Dielectric fittings.
B.
Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping
layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors,
hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and
loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of
anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1.
Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
1.
Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
2.
Design Calculations:
Calculate requirements for selecting seismic
restraints.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas
piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from
installers of the items involved.
E.
Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and
coordinated with other services and utilities.
F.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G.
Welding certificates.
H.
Field quality-control reports.
I.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel
according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
15195 - 2
LK 13534
1.7
1.8
1.9
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing
natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C.
Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to
avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D.
Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility
locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B.
Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service
to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of naturalgas supply according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of natural-gas service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner's
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment
provided.
B.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed
concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
15195 - 3
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard
pattern.
2.
Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding
and socket welding.
3.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat,
ground joint, and threaded ends.
4.
Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum
Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material
group, end connections, and facings:
a.
Material Group: 1.1.
b.
End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c.
Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d.
Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free,
aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
e.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and
stainless steel underground.
5.
Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer
coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a.
Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE
sleeves.
6.
Mechanical Couplings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc.
2)
Smith-Blair, Inc.
b.
Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
c.
Buna-nitrile seals.
d.
Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
e.
Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe
to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
f.
Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall
be factory equipped with anode.
B.
Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
OmegaFlex, Inc.
b.
Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division.
c.
Titeflex.
d.
Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
2.
Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.
3.
Coating: PE with flame retardant.
15195 - 4
LK 13534
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics:
As determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1)
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2)
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed
for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-tometal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends
complying with ASME B1.20.1.
Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating.
Threaded connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and
corrugated tubing outlets.
Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig.
PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.
1.
PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, buttfusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe.
2.
PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying
with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with
ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
3.
Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a.
Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513,
SDR 11 inlet.
b.
Casing:
Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosionprotective coating covering. Vent casing aboveground.
c.
Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.
d.
Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded
connection.
e.
Tracer wire connection.
f.
Ultraviolet shield.
g.
Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or
carrier pipe.
4.
Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a.
Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513,
SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with
corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.
b.
Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded
connection.
c.
Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling.
d.
Factory-connected anode.
e.
Tracer wire connection.
f.
Ultraviolet shield.
g.
Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or
carrier pipe.
5.
Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining
PE pipe to PE pipe.
15195 - 5
LK 13534
a.
6.
7.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
2)
Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
3)
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter
Company.
b.
PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring.
c.
Buna-nitrile seals.
d.
Acetal collets.
e.
Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.
Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE
pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
2)
Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
3)
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter
Company.
b.
Fiber-reinforced plastic body.
c.
PE body tube.
d.
Buna-nitrile seals.
e.
Acetal collets.
f.
Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE
pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc.
2)
Smith-Blair, Inc.
b.
Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
c.
Buna-nitrile seals.
d.
Steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
e.
Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed
underground.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1.
Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2.
Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors:
Comply with
ANSI Z21.69.
3.
Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4.
Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5.
Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
6.
End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8.
Maximum Length: 72 inches.
B.
Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1.
Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
15195 - 6
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
2.4
Nitrile seals.
Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
For indoor or outdoor applications.
Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
C.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends
for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 50 percent free area.
4.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
D.
T-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end
cap for strainer maintenance.
2.
End Connections: Grooved ends.
3.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 57 percent free area.
4.
CWP Rating: 750 psig.
E.
Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosionresistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of
connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying
with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent
phosphorus are prohibited.
MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A.
See "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is
applied in various services.
B.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with
ASME B16.33.
1.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3.
Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4.
Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.
15195 - 7
LK 13534
5.
Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG"
permanently marked on valve body.
C.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
1.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2.
Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3.
Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Manual
Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
4.
Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve
body.
D.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c.
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e.
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3.
Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4.
Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5.
Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6.
Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
7.
Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" Articles.
8.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
9.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve
body.
E.
Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Lee Brass Company.
b.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3.
Plug: Bronze.
4.
Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" Articles.
5.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where
indicated.
6.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
7.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
8.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve
body.
F.
Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
15195 - 8
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G.
2.5
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
b.
Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
c.
Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.
Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" Articles.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where
indicated.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve
body.
Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include,
but are not limited to, the following:
b.
Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.
c.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
d.
Milliken Valve Company.
e.
Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
f.
R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.
2.
Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3.
Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4.
Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5.
Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6.
Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" Articles.
7.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where
indicated.
8.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
9.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve
body.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
General Requirements:
1.
Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2.
Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3.
Elevation compensator.
4.
End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged
for regulators NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
15195 - 9
LK 13534
B.
Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Actaris.
b.
American Meter Company.
c.
Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson
Process Management.
d.
Invensys.
e.
Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
2.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and
deformation at the valve port.
6.
Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
8.
Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at
maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the
regulator.
9.
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream,
and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10.
Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
11.
Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in
opening if not connected to vent piping.
12.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.
C.
Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Actaris.
b.
American Meter Company.
c.
Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
d.
Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson
Process Management.
e.
Invensys.
f.
Maxitrol Company.
g.
Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
2.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and
deformation at the valve port.
6.
Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
8.
Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at
maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the
regulator.
9.
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream,
and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10.
Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
15195 - 10
LK 13534
11.
12.
D.
2.6
Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in
opening if not connected to vent piping.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Canadian Meter Company Inc.
b.
Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
c.
Harper Wyman Co.
d.
Maxitrol Company.
e.
SCP, Inc.
2.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
3.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
6.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
7.
Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane
paint finish.
8.
Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
9.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with
separating nonconductive insulating material.
Include end connections
compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
c.
Jomar International Ltd.
d.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
e.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
f.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
g.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
b.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide
products by one of the following] [include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
15195 - 11
LK 13534
2.
D.
2.7
c.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
d.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Description:
a.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
b.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum at 180 deg F
d.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;
threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Central Plastics Company.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6
inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility,
with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection,
detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored
yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of
piping connections before equipment installation.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or
piping section.
15195 - 12
LK 13534
3.3
3.4
B.
Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to
determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section
affected.
C.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of
accidental ignition.
OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B.
Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished
grade.
Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for
excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
1.
If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade,
install it in containment conduit.
C.
Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D.
Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1.
Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2.
Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by
protective coating manufacturer.
3.
Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
F.
Install pressure gage test nipple for connection of gas manometer downstream
from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section
"Meters and Gages."
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used
to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building
structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
15195 - 13
LK 13534
E.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
G.
Locate valves for easy access.
H.
Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 1 percent down toward drip and
sediment traps.
I.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
J.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L.
Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and
equipment for roughing-in requirements.
M.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect,
including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and
emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
1.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet
plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters,
but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install
with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and
overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof
vent cap. Appliance pressure regulators ¾” or smaller located inside mechanical
rooms may use vent limiting orifices complying with the International Fuel Gas
Code.
O.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings,
below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to
view.
P.
Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed
natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit
constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent
pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent
cap.
1.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and
regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment
conduit.
2.
In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels
must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.
3.
In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow
walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
15195 - 14
LK 13534
a.
4.
3.5
Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not
require striker barriers.
Prohibited Locations:
a.
Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,
clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating
ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
b.
Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
Q.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings
with level side down.
R.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
S.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged
connections.
T.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
U.
Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or
electrically operated valve.
V.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve
Seals for HVAC Piping."
W.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
X.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons
for HVAC Piping."
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated
stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B.
Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access
space adequate for servicing and testing.
D.
Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E.
Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
15195 - 15
LK 13534
3.6
3.7
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints:
1.
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3.
Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside
diameter of pipe.
4.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads
unless dryseal threading is specified.
5.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or
open welds.
D.
Welded Joints:
1.
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified
processes and welding operators.
2.
Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3.
Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by
manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during
construction.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe
and Tube" Chapter.
F.
Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for
natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G.
Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result
in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use
wrench. Do not overtighten.
H.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismicrestraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
15195 - 16
LK 13534
3.8
3.9
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports."
C.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8
inch.
2.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size,
3/8 inch.
4.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2
inch.
5.
NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following
maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2.
NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8
inch.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B.
Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance
equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according
to NFPA 70.
C.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of
appliances.
D.
Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install
valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union
between valve and appliances or equipment.
E.
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as
close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for
piping and valve identification.
B.
Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below
finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
15195 - 17
LK 13534
3.10
3.11
3.12
PAINTING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and
exterior natural-gas piping.
B.
Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters
and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components,
with two coats of rust inhibitive paint .
1.
Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a.
Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat.
d.
Color: Gray.
C.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes
with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel
Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.13
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.
OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1.
PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings;
service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.
2.
Omegaflex PSII corrugated stainless steel pipe with integral containment
conduit in areas where gas line is located below concrete slabs.
3.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical
couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
B.
Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints 2” and smaller.
15195 - 18
LK 13534
2.
C.
3.14
3.15
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints for 2 ½” and
larger.
Containment Conduit:
conduit.
Tracpipe Omegaflex PSII with integral containment
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG
A.
Aboveground, branch piping NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B.
Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:
1.
NPS 2 and smaller; steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded
joints.
2.
NPS 2 ½” and larger; steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded
joints.
3.
Joints in concealed locations shall comply with NFPA 54 and the
International Fuel Gas Code.
ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be:
1.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
B.
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be:
1.
Bronze plug valve.
2.
Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
C.
Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be:
1.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
END OF SECTION
15195 - 19
LK 13534
SECTION 15300
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
PROVISIONS GOVERNING WORK UNDER THIS SECTION
See Division 1.
SYSTEM DESIGN
A.
Design, engineering and approvals:
Sprinkler system shall be designed and
engineered in accordance with NFPA 13, latest edition, and local and state governing
bodies and codes.
1.
Sprinkler system design shall meet approval of Owner's Insurance Underwriter
2.
Sprinkler system design shall meet approval of the City of Lakewood Fire
Department.
B.
Dry sprinklers: Special consideration shall be given to unheated areas which require
sprinklers, so that no condition will exist which will result in frozen sprinklers. Design
system with dry-type system in such areas as required to prevent freezing of the
system.
1.3
A.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawing per Section 15010. Detailed drawings, prints, and specifications.
1.
Obstructions: Ductwork, lights and other obstructions shall be shown for proper
installation of sprinkler work. Show sprinkler drains. Show piping and sprinklers
in each area. Shop Drawings shall be prepared using for reference the
architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical drawings.
DESCRIPTION
A.
System: Include a complete sprinkler system per NFPA 13.
B.
General: Contractor is responsible for providing an operating system complete with all
equipment including connections, alarms, valves, hydrants, shut-offs, switches, heads,
piping and wiring to comply with all requirements of local governing authorities and
obtain their approvals.
15300 - 1
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MATERIALS
Materials specifications: Materials shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
System: Install complete sprinkler systems.
B.
Work: Start at connections to site line termination as shown and work beyond within
buildings.
C.
Design system in accordance with NFPA, local and state governing bodies and code
requirements. Design for group hazard for occupancy of intended building use.
2.3
COMPONENTS
A.
Providecheck valve, drains and other fittings as required by referenced standard and
governing bodies.
B.
SUPPLY PIPING AND DRAINS:
1.
Above ground piping: Meet NFPA requirements
2.
Sprinkler piping: Substantially support form building structure, use only approved
type hangers.
3.
Drains: Show locations and types on Drawings.
4.
Dielectric unions: Install where copper pipe joints steel pipe.
5.
Underground pipe: Ductile iron AWWA C151, Class 51 centrifugal cast,
enameline or cement lined to conform to AWWA C104.
a.
Fittings: AWWA C110.
b.
Rubber gaskets: AWWA C111.
C.
FLUSHING CONNECTIONS: Provide in cross mains.
D.
SLEEVES AND HANGERS:
1.
Sleeves: Set in place for pipes passing thru floors.
2.
Hangers and hanger components: Types as approved by U.L.
E.
SPRINKLER HEADS:
1.
Suites, corridors (lay-in), and offices: Size per NFPA, quick response, ceiling
mounted or side wall mounted in rooms without suspended ceilings. Equal to
Central Sprinkler Co., semi-recessed type, white head with small white
escutcheon.
a.
Sprinkler heads and escutcheons in common and public areas
shall
be of a color specified by the interior designer.
2.
Public areas: Equal to Central Sprinkler Co., rapid response concealed type,
ceiling mounted with small white cover plate.
15300 - 2
LK 13534
a.
3.
Sprinkler heads and escutcheons in common and public areas
be of a color specified by the interior designer.
Unfinished areas: Brass pendent type.
shall
F.
Extra heads: Provide a steel cabinet containing extra heads in accordance with NFPA.
G.
Wrenches: Provide special head wrenches.
H.
Metal guards: Type as required.
I.
Wall and ceiling plates: Chrome plated where exposed to public view.
J.
Signs: Appropriate and necessary enamel signs shall be installed on control valves,
drains, inspector's test, and in accordance with Governing Bodies' Specifications.
2.4
ALARM SYSTEM
A.
Enunciator panel: At Front Desk area.
B.
Monitors: To enunciator panel.
1.
Shut-off's at building riser.
2.
Site valves.
3.
Sprinkler flow switches and all valves at each building.
4.
Post indicator valves.
5.
Backflow preventers.
C.
Application: Flow switches and tamper switches under this Section, remainder of
system which includes enunciator panel and monitors and hook-ups to flow and tamper
switches is under Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
Measurements and layouts: Take measurements and be responsible for exact size
and location of openings required for installation of this work.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, latest edition,
requirements. Sprinkler lines shall be run concealed. Avoid interference with lights,
ducts, and pipes. Sprinkler piping shall be installed maximum height above floor in
locations throughout entire building, except as otherwise required to avoid conflict with
lights, ducts, pipes, and smoke detectors. See NFPA 74E for smoke detector
clearances.
B.
Coordinate this work with other applicable subcontractors.
15300 - 3
LK 13534
C.
TESTING, FLUSHING AND LEAKS:
1.
Sprinkler piping: Test for a period of 2 hours at a hydrostatic pressure of 200#
unless required otherwise by Governing Body.
D.
Welding: Welding of field connections of sprinkler piping will not be permitted.
E.
Shields: Provide shields on all sprinkler heads located near electric panel to limit the
sprinkler discharge on the panels per NFPA 70.
F.
Heads: Locate sprinkler heads so that heads are located no closer than 1'-0" to lights
smoke detectors or other obstructions. Locate head a minimum of 3'0" form
mechanical diffusers or as required otherwise by NFPA 74E.
G.
Firestopping: All penetration thru fire-rated assemblies shall be firestopped by trade
making the penetration. Firestopping shall include the use of fire collars and fire
caulking where plastic piping is utilized. Refer to Section 07275 and Sheet A1.5.
END OF SECTION
15300 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related
components:
1.
Faucets.
2.
Flushometers.
3.
Toilet seats.
4.
Protective shielding guards.
5.
Fixture supports.
6.
Interceptors.
7.
Shower receptors.
8.
Drinking fountain & water coolers.
9.
Disposers.
10.
Water closets.
11.
Urinals.
12.
Lavatories.
13.
Bathtubs.
14.
Individual showers.
15.
Whirlpool bathtubs.
16.
Kitchen sinks.
17.
Service sinks.
18.
Service basins.
19.
Laundry trays.
20.
Owner-furnished fixtures.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories."
2.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor
drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.
3.
Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."
4.
Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior plumbing fixtures and
hydrants.
15410 - 1
LK 13534
1.3
1.4
1.5
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used
by people with disabilities.
C.
Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material.
cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.
D.
Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.
E.
Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture.
Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts,
shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes.
Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
F.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
G.
PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
H.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
I.
Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with
heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
This material includes
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected
fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and
supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and
flow-control rates.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
For plumbing fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of
each category through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.
Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from
a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers
specified for that category.
15410 - 2
LK 13534
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible
and Usable Buildings and Facilities" Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers
Act" and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" for plumbing
fixtures for people with disabilities.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486,
"Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing
fixtures.
E.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components
that are compatible.
G.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for plumbing fixtures:
1.
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
2.
Plastic Bathtubs: ANSI Z124.1.
3.
Plastic Lavatories: ANSI Z124.3.
4.
Plastic Laundry Trays: ANSI Z124.6.
5.
Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.
6.
Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.
7.
Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6.
8.
Plastic Urinal Fixtures: ANSI Z124.9.
9.
Plastic Whirlpool Bathtubs: ANSI Z124.1 and ASME A112.19.7M.
10.
Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
11.
Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
12.
Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
13.
Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
14.
Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
15.
Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
16.
Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
17.
Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
18.
Whirlpool Bathtub Fittings: ASME A112.19.8M.
H.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for lavatory and sink faucets:
1.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray:
ASME A112.18.3M.
2.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:
ASME A112.18.3M.
3.
Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7.
Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
15410 - 3
LK 13534
8.
9.
10.
11.
NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for bathtub bathtub/shower and shower faucets:
1.
Backflow
Protection
Devices
for
Hand-Held
Showers:
ASME A112.18.3M.
2.
Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald
Faucets: ASSE 1016.
3.
Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.
4.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5.
Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
6.
High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
7.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
8.
Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
9.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10.
Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASTM F 444 and
ASSE 1016.
11.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
12.
Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
J.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for miscellaneous fittings:
1.
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2.
Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3.
Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4.
Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5.
Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7.
Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
K.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for miscellaneous components:
1.
Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2.
Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3.
Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4.
Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5.
Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
6.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7.
Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
8.
Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
9.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10.
Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
11.
Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
12.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
13.
Whirlpool Bathtub Equipment: UL 1795.
15410 - 4
LK 13534
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Structural failures of unit shell.
b.
Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2.
Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One Three year(s) from
date of Substantial Completion.
3.
Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
4.
Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: Five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LAVATORY FAUCETS
A.
Lavatory Faucets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the product indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
2.2
Description: Single-control mixing and Two-handle mixing valve. Include
hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
a.
Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.
b.
Finish: Polished chrome plate.
c.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
BATHTUB AND SHOWER FAUCETS
A.
Bathtub and Shower Faucets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the product indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
B.
Description: Single-control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water
indicators and tub spout. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies.
a.
Body Material: Solid brass.
b.
Finish: Polished chrome plate.
c.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
Drinking Fountains:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the product indicated on Drawings without substitution:
15410 - 5
LK 13534
2.
2.3
SINK FAUCETS
A.
Sink Faucets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the product indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
2.4
Description: Kitchen faucet without spray. Include hot- and cold-water
indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes;
coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
a.
Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.
b.
Finish: Polished chrome plate.
c.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
FLUSHOMETERS
A.
Flushometers:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the products indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
2.5
Description: Accessible, Style W, wall-mounting drinking fountain.
a.
Material: Stainless steel.
b.
Receptor Shape: oval.
c.
Back Panel: Stainless-steel wall plate behind drinking fountain.
d.
Bubblers: Two, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck.
e.
Control: Push button.
f.
Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve.
g.
Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap
complying with ASME A112.18.2.
h.
Support: Type I, water cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture Supports"
Article.
Description: Automatic sensor flushometers for urinal and water-closettype fixture.
Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal
components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve,
vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated
finish on exposed parts.
a.
Internal Design: Diaphragm operation.
b.
Style: Exposed.
c.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
TOILET SEATS
A.
Toilet Seats:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the product indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.
a.
Material: Molded, solid plastic.
15410 - 6
LK 13534
b.
c.
2.6
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A.
2.7
Color: White.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a.
Engineered Brass Co.
b.
Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.
c.
McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d.
Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.
e.
TCI Products.
f.
TRUEBRO, Inc.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products
Operation.
2.
Description: Manufactured rigid plastic wraps for covering plumbing
fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply
with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
Josam Company.
2.
MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.
3.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
C.
Water-Closet Supports:
1.
Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible and standard
mounting height of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single
or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as
required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet;
and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional
extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
D.
Urinal Supports:
1.
Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling
with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wallmounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
2.
Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
15410 - 7
LK 13534
E.
2.8
DISPOSERS
A.
2.9
Lavatory Supports:
1.
Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for
wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
2.
Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
Disposers:
1.
Refer to Architectural appliance specifications. All guestroom kitchenette
sinks require disposers.
WATER CLOSETS
A.
Public Area Water Closets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the products indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
B.
Guestroom Water Closets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the products indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
2.10
Description Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture
designed for flushometer valve operation.
a.
Style: One piece.
1)
Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.
2)
Color: white.
b.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
Description: Floor-mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed
for gravity-type tank operation.
a.
Style: Close coupled.
1)
Bowl Type: Elongated design. Include bolt caps matching
fixture.
2)
Height: Standard and Accessible.
3)
Tank: Gravity type with trim. Include cover.
4)
Trip Mechanism: Lever-handle actuator. Provide alternate
tank where required to mount handle on wide side of
compartment per ADA requirements.
5)
Color: White.
6)
See plumbing fixture schedule.
URINALS
A.
Urinals:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
15410 - 8
LK 13534
2.
2.11
LAVATORIES
A.
2.12
Lavatories:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
b.
Kohler Co.
2.
Description: Accessible vitreous-china fixture.
a.
Refer to fixture schedule for types and requirements.
SINKS
A.
Sinks:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the product indicated on Drawings without substitution:
2.
2.13
Description: One compartment, under counter-mounting, stainless-steel.
a.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
BATHTUBS
A.
Bathtubs:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the products indicated on Drawings without substitution.
2.
2.14
a.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
b.
Kohler Co.
Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture
designed for flushometer valve operation.
a.
Type: Siphon jet.
b.
Color: White.
c.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
Description: Enameled, cast-iron fixture.
a.
Bathing Surface: Slip resistant.
b.
Color: White.
c.
Drain Location: left or right as required.
d.
See plumbing fixture schedule.
SHOWERS
A.
Individual Showers:
a.
Shower bases and enclosure shall be as specified in the
Architectural specifications.
15410 - 9
LK 13534
2.15
SERVICE BASINS
A.
Service Basins:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Acorn Engineering Company.
b.
Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
c.
Florestone Products Co., Inc.
d.
Stern-Williams Co., Inc.
e.
Mustee, E. L. & Sons, Inc.
2.
2.16
Description: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting, precast terrazzo or castpolymer fixture with rim guard.
a.
Shape: Square.
b.
Size: 24 by 24 inches.
c.
Height: 6 inches.
d.
Tiling Flange: Required.
e.
Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.
f.
Color: White.
g.
Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.
LAUNDRY TUBS
A.
Laundry Tubs:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
b.
Florestone Products Co., Inc.
c.
Mustee, E. L. & Sons, Inc.
2.
Description: Stand-mounting, plastic laundry trays.
a.
Color: White.
b.
Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 outlet.
c.
Stand: Painted steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping
systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture
installation.
B.
Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where
fixtures will be installed.
15410 - 10
LK 13534
C.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste
piping.
3.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for
accessible fixtures.
C.
Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to
supports.
D.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or
building substrate.
E.
Install ADA protective supply and trap insulation on all ADA lavatories and sinks.
F.
Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
G.
Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor
substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
H.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
I.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
J.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be
connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate
within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation.
1.
Exception: Use ball or gate valve if supply stops are not specified with
fixture. Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
K.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly
connected to sanitary drainage system.
L.
Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly
connected to drainage system.
M.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle
mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that
are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
N.
Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on
wide side of compartment.
15410 - 11
LK 13534
3.3
O.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
P.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if
required.
Q.
Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies
at stop valves.
R.
Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet
spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include
adapters if required.
S.
Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower
arms.
T.
Install traps on fixture outlets.
1.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2.
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
U.
Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch
where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
V.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if
required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 15
Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
W.
Set bathtubs, and shower receptors and service basins as required by
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
X.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitarytype, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture
color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,
waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
15410 - 12
LK 13534
3.4
3.5
3.6
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for
locations where installed.
B.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other
specified components.
C.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation.
Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow
and stream.
C.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
E.
Adjust all tank type water closets for proper flow and proper flushing siphonic
action per the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. All water closets
shall completely evacuate the bowl with a single flush.
CLEANING
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1.
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and
reinstall strainers and spouts.
2.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B.
3.7
A.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and
fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
15410 - 13
LK 13534
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in
writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION
15410 - 14
LK 13534
SECTION 15441
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.5
1.6
Section Includes:
1.
In-line circulating pumps.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less
than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of
construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points
plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
15441 - 1
LK 13534
1.7
B.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C.
Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment
provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMPS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation.
3.
TACO Incorporated.
B.
Description: All bronze, factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage.
C.
Pump Construction:
1.
Casing: Radially split.
2.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
3.
Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft
sleeve. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
4.
Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and rubber bellows and gasket.
5.
Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.
6.
Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and
shaft misalignment.
D.
Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or
rigidly mounted to pump casing.
E.
Capacities and Characteristics:
a.
See pump schedule.
MOTORS
A.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section
"Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough
so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range
above 1.0.
2.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
15441 - 2
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of
connections before pump installation.
PUMP INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with HI 1.4.
B.
Install in-line pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to
support pump weight.
1.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in
Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.
2.
Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic
Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping
equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.
1.
Install shutoff valve, temperature gauge, pressure gauge and strainer on
suction side of each pump, and pressure gauge, check, shutoff, and
balancing valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same
size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified
in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and
comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 15 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
D.
Comply with Division 16 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.
15441 - 3
LK 13534
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.
Check piping connections for tightness.
3.
Clean strainers on suction piping.
4.
Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a.
Verify bearing lubrication.
b.
Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for
handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If
pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is
determined and corrected.
c.
Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5.
Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare
pump for operation.
6.
Start motor.
7.
Open discharge valve slowly.
8.
Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.
9.
Adjust timer settings.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
END OF SECTION
15441 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 15446
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Section Includes:
1.
Submersible sump pumps.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps and controls, to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C.
Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
15446 - 1
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A.
2.2
Submersible, Fixed-Position, Double-Seal Sump Pumps:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product.
2.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested sump-pump unit.
3.
Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled,
overhung-impeller, centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and
HI 1.3.
4.
Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet, legs that elevate pump to
permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge for piping connection.
5.
Impeller:
Statically and dynamically balanced, design for clear
wastewater handling, and keyed and secured to shaft.
6.
Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, greaselubricated ball bearings.
7.
Seal: Mechanical.
8.
Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload
protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable
of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
9.
Controls:
a.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b.
Switch Type: Float switches with float rods and rod buttons.
c.
High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm,
with electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for
remote alarm bell. Provide remote contacts for connection to
building automation system.
MOTORS
A.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section
"Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough
so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range
above 1.0.
2.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
B.
Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.
15446 - 2
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
3.3
Pump Installation Standards: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.5
Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm
drainage piping connections before sump pump installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Excavation and filling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Storm
Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
15446 - 3
LK 13534
3.6
STARTUP SERVICE
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.7
ADJUSTING
3.8
A.
Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B.
Adjust control set points.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps.
END OF SECTION
15446 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 15450
WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.5
This Section includes water storage tanks and related accessories for indoor
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished
specialties, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thickness, insulation,
finishes and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components,
and piping connections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of water storage tanks and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B.
ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1, where indicated.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
15450 - 1
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
INSULATED, STEEL, PRESSURE, WATER STORAGE TANKS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
Lochinvar Corp.
B.
Description: Steel, vertical, pressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls.
C.
Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for
125-psig working pressure.
D.
Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
1.
NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.
E.
Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:
1.
Pressure relief valve.
2.
Pressure gage.
3.
Thermometer.
F.
Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to
tank before testing and labeling.
G.
Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier
materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank
fittings and outlets.
1.
Coating: Glass.
H.
Insulation: Factory-installed, fiberglass or polyurethane foam; surrounding entire
tank except connections and other openings; suitable for tank operating
temperature; and complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
I.
Jacket: Steel, with manufacturer's standard finish, unless otherwise indicated.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and
inspections and prepare test reports:
15450 - 2
LK 13534
1.
Pressure Testing for ASME-Code, Potable-Water Storage Tanks:
Hydrostatically test to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks.
Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1-1/2 times tank pressure
rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no
drop in pressure, and check for leaks. Replace tanks that fail test with
new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for tanks. Refer to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full
perimeter of base.
2.
For supported tanks, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
4.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported tanks.
B.
Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in
Division 3.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored.
Arrange so devices needing servicing are accessible.
B.
Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
C.
Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping, if
indicated. Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Division 15
Section "Meters and Gages."
D.
Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:
1.
Pressure relief valves.
2.
Temperature and pressure relief valves.
3.
Connections to accessories.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
15450 - 3
LK 13534
3.4
3.5
B.
Install piping adjacent to water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with
shutoff valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over
closest floor drains.
1.
General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
a.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Gate or ball.
b.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Gate or butterfly.
c.
Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or
nipple in outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for
garden-hose service, threaded cap, and chain.
2.
Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with
dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following final checks before filling:
1.
Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
2.
Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.
a.
Manually operate pressure relief valves.
b.
Adjust pressure settings.
B.
Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with
water to operating level.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and water storage tanks.
END OF SECTION
15450 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 15469
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Commercial Water Softeners
2.
Chemicals
3.
Water Testing Sets
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 15140 – Domestic Water Piping
REFERENCES
A.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1.
ASME
B.
ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (Former American Society for Testing
and Materials)
1.
D859 "Test Method for Silica in Water"
2.
D1067 "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water"
3.
D1068 "Test Methods for Iron in Water"
4.
D1126 "Test Method for Hardness in Water"
5.
D1129 "Terminology Relating to Water"
6.
D3370 "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits"
C.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1.
70 "National Electric Code"
D.
NFS International (NFS) Publications:
1.
NSF/ANSI 44 "Residential Cation Exchange Water Softeners"
2.
NSF/ANSI 61 "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects"
E.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1.
486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With
Copper Conductors”
2.
486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01330 indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1.
Product Data:
a.
Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; ion-exchange resins; salt purity and form; furnished
specialties; and accessories.
15469 - 1
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
1.5
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment layouts and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
a.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control
systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Reports: For softener tanks, as
required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Manufacturer's Field Service Reports: As specified in this Section.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
Maintenance Agreement: As specified in this Section.
Maintenance Data: For water softeners to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 01.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of water softeners and are based on the specific system indicated.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive
Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair
or replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period. Include coverage for the following:
1.
Attrition loss of resin not to exceed 3 percent per year.
2.
Resin not to be washed out of system during service run or backwashing
period.
3.
Effluent turbidity not to be greater and color not to be darker than
incoming water.
4.
Underdrain system, gravel, and resin not to become fouled, with turbidity
or by dirt, rust, or scale from softener equipment or soft water, while
operating according to manufacturer's written operating instructions.
5.
Response time shall be less than 24 from time of contact, seven (7) days
per week.
C.
Warranty Period: Not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
15469 - 2
LK 13534
1.6
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance: Submit four copies of manufacturer's "Agreement for Continued
Service and Maintenance," before Substantial Completion, for Owner's
acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for furnishing chemicals and providing
continued testing and servicing to include replacing materials and equipment.
Include one-year term of agreement with option for one-year renewal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
B.
2.2
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Commercial Water Softeners:
a.
Culligan International Co.
COMMERCIAL WATER SOFTENERS
A.
Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type, commercial water softener.
B.
Configuration:
C.
NSF Compliance:
1.
NSF 44, "Cation Exchange Water Softeners."
D.
Softener Tank: Fiberglass construction, pressure-vessel quality. Include
hydrostatic test at minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating and the
following:
1.
Construction: Non-ASME code.
2.
Pressure Rating: 100 psig minimum.
3.
Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 40 to at least
100 deg.
4.
Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal
resin bed level.
5.
Handholes: 4 inches round or 4 by 6 inches elliptical, in top head and
lower sidewall of tanks 30 inches and smaller in diameter.
6.
Finish: Exterior of tank spray painted with rust-resistant prime coat, 2- to
3-mil dry film thickness. Interior sandblasted and lined with epoxypolyamide coating, 8- to 10-mil dry film thickness.
7.
Upper Distribution System: Single, point type, fabricated from
galvanized-steel pipe and fittings.
8.
Lower Distribution System: Hub and radial-arm or header-lateral type;
fabricated from PVC pipe and fittings with individual, fine-slotted, nonclogging PE strainers; arranged for even flow distribution through resin
bed.
E.
Controls: Fully automatic; factory mounted on units and factory-wired cycle
controls. Include the following:
1.
Adjustable duration of various regeneration steps.
2.
Push-button start and complete manual operation.
15469 - 3
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Electric time clock and switch for fully automatic operation, adjustable to
initiate regeneration at any hour of day and any day of week or at fixed
intervals.
Sequence of Operation: Program multi-port pilot-control valve to
automatically pressure actuate main operating valve through steps of
regeneration and return to service. Include the following:
a.
Pointer on pilot-control valve to indicate cycle of operation.
b.
Means of manual operation of pilot-control valve if power fails.
Operating Valves: Industrial, automatic, multi-port, diaphragm type with
the following features:
a.
Opening and closing, non-slam operation.
b.
Diaphragm guiding on full perimeter from fully open to fully closed.
c.
Isolated dissimilar metals within valve.
d.
Self-adjusting, internal, automatic brine injector that will draw brine
and rinse at constant rate independent of pressure.
e.
Valve for single unit with internal automatic bypass of raw water
during regeneration.
f.
Sampling cocks for soft water.
g.
Special tools are not required for service.
Flow Control: Automatic, to control backwash and flush rates over wide
variations in operating pressures, and that does not require field
adjustments.
a.
Meter Control: Equip each softener tank with signal-register-head
water meter that will produce electrical signal indicating need for
regeneration on reaching hand-set total in gallons. Design so
signal will continue until reset.
F.
Brine Tank: Combination brine and brine measuring. Include single wet-salt
storage section.
1.
Construction: Fabricated from 3/16-inch-thick fiberglass or 3/8-inch-thick
molded PE. Include plastic cover.
2.
Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of
brine withdrawn and freshwater refill. Include brine tubing and fittings.
3.
Size: Sufficient for at least four regenerations at full salting.
G.
Include the following factory-installed accessories:
1.
Piping, valves, drains, and pressure gages.
2.
Sampling cocks.
3.
Main-operating-valve position indicators.
4.
Water meters.
CHEMICALS
A.
Ion-Exchange Resin: High-capacity, sulfonated polystyrene that is stable over
entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock.
Include capacity to 30,000 grains of calcium carbonate hardness/cu. ft. of resin
when regenerated with 15 lb of salt.
B.
Salt for Brine-Tank Applications: High-purity, sodium chloride that is free of dirt
and foreign material. Rock and granulated forms are unacceptable.
1.
Form: Food-grade salt pellets.
15469 - 4
LK 13534
2.4
WATER TESTING SETS
A.
Water-Hardness Testing Set: Manufacturer's standard testing apparatus and
chemicals with testing procedure instructions and metal container suitable for
wall mounting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.2
3.3
Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for equipment. Refer to Section
03300 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION
A.
Install water softener equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb, according
to manufacturer's written instructions, layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Arrange units so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.
B.
Anchor tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
C.
Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each
water softener tank. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for
pressure gages.
D.
Install water testing sets near each water softener and mount on wall where
indicated.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Make piping connections to dissimilar-metal water piping with dielectric fittings.
Refer to Section 15050 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for dielectric
fittings.
D.
Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
E.
Install brine lines and fittings furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory mounted.
F.
Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. Electrical power
wiring, devices, and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
G.
Ground equipment.
15469 - 5
LK 13534
1.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field assembly of components and installation of water
softeners, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1.
Leak Tests: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with
new units, and retest.
3,
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.
Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day
intervals (total of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required
water performance characteristics. Comply with the following:
1.
ASTM D859, "Test Method for Silica in Water."
2.
ASTM D1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water."
3.
ASTM D1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water."
4.
ASTM D1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water."
5.
ASTM D1129, "Terminology Relating to Water."
6.
ASTM D3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits."
COMMISSIONING
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
Perform the following final checks before startup:
1.
Water Piping Systems: Verify that tests have been completed.
2.
Load Softener Tank: Install gravel to cover lower distribution system and
add water; smooth gravel surface and add softening resin.
3.
Load Brine Tank: Add water and fill tank with pellet-form salt.
C.
Energize circuits.
D.
Adjust operating controls.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1.
Conduct training as specified in Section 01820 - "Training”.
2.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for
starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
END OF SECTION
15469 - 6
LK 13534
SECTION 15486
FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Commercial, gas-fired, high-efficiency, storage, domestic-water heaters.
2.
Commercial water heating boilers.
3.
Domestic-water heater accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include
rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas-fired, domestic-water heater,
from manufacturer.
D.
Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Source quality-control reports.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
15486 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water
heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
C.
ASME Compliance:
1.
Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,
domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2.
Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,
finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV.
D.
NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact
with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components Health Effects."
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b.
Faulty operation of controls.
c.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
use.
2.
Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a.
Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Two year(s).
b.
Commercial, Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1) Heat Exchanger: Five years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Two year(s).
3) Separate Hot-Water Storage Tanks: Five years.
c.
Compression Tanks: Five years.
15486 - 2
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
Commercial, Gas-Fired, High-Efficiency, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
Lochinvar Corporation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent
combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions.
Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum workingpressure rating.
a.
Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach
tappings to tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24
for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
b.
Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
c.
Lining: Cement complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a.
Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b.
Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c.
Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
d.
Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage
tank except connections and controls.
e.
Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f.
Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing
agency requirements for gas-fired, high-efficiency, domestic-water
heaters and natural-gas fuel.
g.
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
h.
Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff
devices or systems.
i.
Combination-Temperature-and-Pressure-Relief-Valves:
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. Include one or more relief valves with total
relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure
setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select
one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
Extend PVC intake and vent piping through roof with concentric vent kit.
Capacity and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.
15486 - 3
LK 13534
2.2
COMMERCIAL, GAS FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS WITH SEPARATE
STORAGE TANKS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following products:
a.
Lochinvar Corporation.
B.
Description
1.
Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, water-tube condensing water heater
with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including
insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply,
return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating service
only.
2.
Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel heat exchangers.
3.
Combustion Chamber: Stainless steel, sealed.
4.
Burner: Natural gas, forced draft drawing from gas premixing valve.
5.
Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to
prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber.
a.
Motors:
Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section
"Motors."
1) Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large
enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service
factor range above 1.0.
C.
Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.
D.
Ignition: Silicone carbide hot-surface ignition that includes flame safety supervision
and 100 percent main-valve shutoff.
E.
Integral Circulator: Bronze body and stainless-steel impeller sized for minimum flow
required in heat exchanger.
F.
Casing:
1.
Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.
2.
Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.
3.
Finish: Textured epoxy.
4.
Insulation: Minimum 1-inch thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat
exchanger.
5.
Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.
6.
Mounting base to secure boiler.
G.
Characteristics and Capacities: Refer to schedule on drawings
H.
TRIM
1.
Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
2.
Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.
3.
Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.
4.
Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination
water-pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure
and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full
range.
15486 - 4
LK 13534
5.
6.
7.
Air Vent: Automatic.
Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.
Circulation Pump: Non-overloading, in-line pump with split-capacitor motor
having thermal-overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate
at specified boiler pressures and temperatures.
I.
CONTROLS
1.
Refer to Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
2.
Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:
a.
Control transformer.
b.
Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable.
c.
Operating Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle burner.
d.
Pump Control: Cycle boiler circulating pumps.
e.
Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed
panel to control burner firing rate to maintain heating water temperature
according to the BAS control sequence.
3.
Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety
controls limit burner operation.
a.
High Cutoff: Reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above
maximum boiler design temperature.
b.
Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation
on low water. Cutoff switch shall be manual-reset type.
c.
Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted
on boiler combustion-air inlet.
d.
Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch;
shall sound alarm for above conditions.
4.
Building Management System Interface: Factory install hardware and software
to enable building management system to monitor, control, and display boiler
status and alarms.
a.
Hardwired Points:
1) Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm low water level
alarm.
2) Control: On/off operation, hot water supply temperature set-point
adjustment.
b.
A communication interface with building management system shall enable
building management system operator to remotely control and monitor
the boiler from an operator workstation. Control features available, and
monitoring points displayed, locally at boiler control panel shall be
available through building management system.
J.
ELECTRICAL POWER
1.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections
are specified in Division 16 Sections.
2.
Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches,
motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall
provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.
a.
House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
b.
Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.
c.
Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.
d.
Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.
15486 - 5
LK 13534
e.
f.
K.
2.3
Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to control with a
disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
VENTING KITS
1.
Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: Complete system, schedule 40 PVC.
DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A.
Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
AMTROL Inc.
b.
Honeywell International Inc.
c.
Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.
d.
State Industries.
e.
Taco, Inc.
2.
Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and
factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum
system-operating pressure at tank.
3.
Construction:
a.
Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and
labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b.
Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
c.
Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
4.
Capacity and Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings.
B.
Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3.
Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain
outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7
garden-hose threads.
C.
Piping-Type Heat Traps:
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D.
Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.
E.
Manifold Kits: Domestic-water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet
piping for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-,
butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and
memory-stop balancing valves to provide balanced flow through each domestic-water
heater.
1.
Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves
specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
2.
Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Division 15 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to
15486 - 6
LK 13534
F.
Gas Shutoff Valves:
installation in piping.
G.
Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig
pressure rating as required to match gas supply.
H.
Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off
automatic valve.
I.
Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at
least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water
heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends
into storage tank.
1.
Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.
2.
Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.
J.
Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater
working-pressure rating.
1.
Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.
2.
Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.
2.4
ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated.
Furnish for
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters and storage tanks
specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
B.
Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"
for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water
heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in
Division 3 Sections.
1.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
2.
Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.
3.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
4.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
15486 - 7
LK 13534
5.
6.
7.
Place and secure anchorage devices.
Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.
B.
Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.
1.
Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water
heaters without shutoff valves.
2.
Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water
heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to
reduce gas pressure at burner.
3.
Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters
if required for operation of safety control.
4.
Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and
automatic gas valves specified in Division 15 Section "Facility Natural-Gas
Piping."
C.
Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage
tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend
commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water
piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest
floor drain.
D.
Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domesticwater heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with
drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and
discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
E.
Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open
drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping
for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for
hose-end drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
F.
Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters.
Comply with
requirements for thermometers specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
G.
Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water
heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each
domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water
heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet.
Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with requirements for thermometers specified
in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
H.
Fill domestic-water heaters with water.
I.
Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air per manufacturer’s written
instructions.
15486 - 8
LK 13534
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Division 15 Section
"Domestic Water Piping."
B.
Comply with requirements for fuel-oil piping specified in Division 15 Section "Facility
Fuel-Oil Piping."
C.
Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Division 15 Section "Facility
Natural-Gas Piping."
D.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
E.
Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for
service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of
domestic-water heaters.
3.3
A.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in
Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper operation.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
B.
Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"
for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gas-fired domestic-water heaters.
END OF SECTION
15486 - 9
LK 13534
SECTION 15671
AIR COOLED HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes air-cooled heat pump condensing units.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each unit, include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnished specialties, and accessories. Include equipment dimensions, weights and
structural loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Structural members to which condensing units will be attached.
Liquid and vapor pipe sizes.
Refrigerant specialties.
Piping including connections, oil traps, and double risers.
Evaporators.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For condensing units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
E.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
F.
Green Submittals:
1.
Manufacturers' product data for refrigerants, including printed statement that
refrigerants are free of HCFCs.
15671 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
condensing units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
1.
1.5
Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
C.
Coordinate location of piping and electrical rough-ins.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Compressor failure.
Condenser coil leak.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
15671 - 2
LK 13534
1.
2.2
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
HEAT PUMP CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Carrier Corporation; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.
Lennox Industries Inc.
Rheem Manufacturing Air Conditioning Div.
Trane Co. (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group.
York International Corp.
B.
Description: Factory assembled and tested, consisting of compressor, condenser coil,
fan, motors, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls.
C.
Compressor: Scroll, hermetically sealed, with rubber vibration isolators.
1.
2.
3.
Motor: Single speed, and includes thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
Accumulator: Suction tube.
Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
D.
Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; circuited for integral liquid
subcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports.
E.
Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated,
totally enclosed fan motor with thermal-overload protection.
F.
Accessories:
1.
Crankcase heater.
2.
Cycle Protector: Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid compressor cycling.
3.
Electronic programmable thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and
evaporator fan.
4.
Evaporator Freeze Thermostat: Temperature-actuated switch that stops unit
when evaporator reaches freezing temperature.
5.
Filter-dryer.
6.
High-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on high
refrigerant pressure.
7.
Liquid-line solenoid.
8.
Low Ambient Controller: Controls condenser fan speed to permit operation down
to minus 20 deg F with time-delay relay to bypass low-pressure switch.
9.
Low-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on low
refrigerant pressure.
10. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.
11. Thermostatic expansion valve.
12. Time-Delay Relay: Continues operation of evaporator fan after compressor
shuts off.
15671 - 3
LK 13534
G.
2.3
A.
Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for
access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount
service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
MOTORS
General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1.
2.
2.4
A.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections
are specified in Division 16 Sections.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.
1.
2.
Coefficient of Performance:
Equal to or greater
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New
Rise Residential Buildings."
Energy-Efficiency Ratio:
Equal to or greater
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New
Rise Residential Buildings."
than prescribed by
Buildings except Lowthan prescribed by
Buildings except Low-
B.
Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C.
Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
condensing units.
B.
Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
C.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where condensing units will be
installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
15671 - 4
LK 13534
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B.
Install condensing units located on grade on concrete base. Concrete base is
specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and
concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3.
C.
Concrete Bases:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete slab. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of the base.
For equipment supported on structural slab, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts
that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices.
Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Install roof-mounting units on equipment supports specified in Division 7.
E.
Vibration Isolation: Mount condensing units on rubber pads with a minimum deflection
of 1/4 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
F.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
G.
Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are
not factory mounted.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so
it does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
D.
Connect field fabricated refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain
required access to unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping
and specialties are specified in Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
E.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
F.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
15671 - 5
LK 13534
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for
leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks
exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Verify proper airflow over coils.
B.
Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning condensing units and retest as specified above.
3.5
A.
STARTUP SERVICE
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.
Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.
Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
Verify that controls are connected and operational.
B.
Lubricate bearings on fans.
C.
Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
D.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's
startup checklist.
E.
Measure and record airflow over coils.
F.
Verify proper operation of condenser capacity control device.
G.
Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
15671 - 6
LK 13534
3.6
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer to Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15671
15671 - 7
LK 13534
SECTION 15731
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes packaged terminal air conditioners and their accessories and controls,
in the following configurations:
1.
1.3
Vertical packaged Heat-pump units.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, electrical characteristics, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For packaged terminal heat pump air conditioners. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details for wall penetrations and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Color Samples: For unit cabinet, discharge grille, and exterior louver, and for each
color and texture specified.
D.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for packaged terminal air
conditioners.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged terminal air conditioners to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
G.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
15731 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation
Rate Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of packaged terminal heat pump air conditioners and
wall construction with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of packaged terminal heat pump air conditioners that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturer's standard, but
not less than five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion, including
components and labor.
Warranty Period for Nonsealed System Parts: Manufacturer's standard, but not
less than five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion, including only
components and excluding labor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings:
1.
2.2
A.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Appliances.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, self-contained, packaged terminal heat
pump air conditioner with room cabinet, electric refrigeration system, heating and
temperature controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil; with hardwired
chassis.
15731 - 2
LK 13534
2.3
A.
CHASSIS
Cabinet: 0.052-inch- thick steel with removable front panel with concealed latches.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Mounting: Wall with wall sleeve.
Discharge Flange to allow duct connection.
Louvers: Extruded aluminum with enamel finish. Color to be selected by
Architect.
Finish: Baked enamel.
Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply
with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
Wall Sleeves: Galvanized steel with polyester finish.
Refrigeration System: Direct-expansion indoor coil with capillary restrictor; and
hermetically sealed scroll compressor with vibration isolation and overload protection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indoor and Outdoor Coils: Seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into
aluminum fins with capillary tube distributor on indoor coil.
Accumulator.
Constant-pressure expansion valve.
Reversing valve.
Charge: R-410A.
C.
Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal; with motor and positive-pressure ventilation
damper with concealed manual operator.
D.
Filters: Washable polyurethane in molded plastic frame.
E.
Condensate Drain: Drain pan piping to direct condensate to building waste and vent
piping.
1.
F.
Outdoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal or propeller type with separate motor.
1.
2.4
A.
Comply with ASHRAE 62.1 for drain pan construction and connections.
Indoor and Outdoor Fan Motors: Two speed; comply with NEMA designation,
temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for
motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
a.
Fan Motors: Permanently lubricated split capacitor.
b.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so
driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above
1.0.
c.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
CONTROLS
Control Module: Unit-mounted digital panel with touchpad temperature control and
with touchpad for heating, cooling, and fan operation. Include the following features:
15731 - 3
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Low Ambient Lockout Control: Prevents cooling-cycle operation below 40 deg F
outdoor air temperature.
Heat-Pump Ambient Control: Field-adjustable switch changes to heat-pump
heating operation above 40 deg F and to supplemental heating below plus 25
deg F.
Temperature-Limit Control: Prevents occupant from exceeding preset setback or
setup temperature.
Building Automation System Interface: Allows remote on-off control with setback
temperature control.
Reverse-Cycle Defrost: Solid-state sensor monitors frost buildup on outdoor coil
and reverses unit to melt frost.
B.
Remote Control: Standard unit-mounted controls with remote-mounted, low-voltage
adjustable thermostat with heat anticipator, heat-off-cool-auto switch, and on-auto fan
switch.
C.
Outdoor Air: Manual intake damper supplied with unit to remain closed.
2.5
A.
2.6
CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
Airflow: Refer to schedule on drawings.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 300, "Sound Rating and
Sound Transmission Loss of Packaged Terminal Equipment."
B.
Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 310/380/CSA C744,
"Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and
tolerances.
B.
Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant
materials and applications are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
C.
Install and anchor wall sleeves to withstand, without damage to equipment and
structure, seismic forces required by building code.
3.2
A.
CONNECTIONS
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
15731 - 4
LK 13534
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
2.
After installing packaged terminal air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
D.
Packaged terminal air conditioners will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
After
wall.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
installation, verify the following: Unit is level on base and is flashed in exterior
Unit casing has no visible damage.
Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans have no visible damage.
Labels are clearly visible.
Controls are connected and operable.
Shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps are removed.
Filters are installed and clean.
Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
Electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
Installation.
Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions, including the following:
a.
Lubricate bearings on fan.
b.
Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
After startup service and performance test, change filters.
15731 - 5
LK 13534
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.6
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged terminal air conditioners.
END OF SECTION
15731 - 6
LK 13534
SECTION 15733
ROOFTOP REPLACEMENT-AIR UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes cooling and heating rooftop replacement-air units.
DEFINITIONS
DDC: Direct-digital controls.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, methods of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer:
1.
Design Calculations: For selecting and designing restrained vibration isolation
roof-curb rails.
2.
Mounting Details: For securing and flashing roof curb to roof structure. Indicate
coordinating requirements with existing roof membrane system.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Rooftop replacement-air units to roof-curb mounting details
drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each
other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
Size and location of rooftop replacement-air unit mounting rails and anchor points
and methods for anchoring units to roof curb.
2.
Required roof penetrations for ducts, pipes, and electrical raceways, including
size and location of each penetration.
D.
Startup service reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For rooftop replacement-air units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
15733 - 1
LK 13534
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
rooftop replacement-air units and are based on the specific system indicated.
B.
Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236,
Safety Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D.
Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
E.
Unit and refrigeration system shall comply with ASHRAE 15, Safety Standard for
Mechanical Refrigeration.
F.
Unit Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) shall be equal to or greater that prescribed by
ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
G.
Unit shall be safety certified by ETL and ETL US listed. Unit nameplate shall include
the ETL/ETL Canada label.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size, location, and installation of rooftop replacement-air unit
manufacturer's roof curbs and equipment supports with original roof Installer.
1.
Coordinate installation of restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails, which are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
replace components listed below that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan.
2.
Filters: One set for each unit.
15733 - 2
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
AAON, Inc.
2.
Addison Products Company.
3.
Des Champs Laboratories, Incorporated.
4.
Trane
5.
Carrier
6.
Greenheck
7.
Reznor
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A.
Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans,
dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, reheat coil, exhaust fans, energy
recovery wheels, and unit controls.
B.
Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the DX coils,
pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run
test report shall be supplied with the unit in the service compartment’s literature pocket.
C.
Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution
areas for safety and to assist service personnel.
D.
Unit components shall be labeled, including refrigeration system components and
electrical and controls components.
E.
Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet.
F.
Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.
G.
Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be
affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.
H.
Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of
the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.
2.3
A.
CABINET
Construction: Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both
sides and a thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents
moisture accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat
transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel. Unit shall
be supplied with lifting lugs and knockouts for electrical and piping connections.
15733 - 3
LK 13534
B.
Internal Insulation: Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of
13. Foam insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of
610°F
C.
Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet.
Cabinet leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the
minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Panel deflection
shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a maximum 8 inches
of positive or negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage. Deflection shall be
measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. Continuous sealing shall be
included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air
leakage. Piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to
reduce air leakage.
D.
Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall have
rain break overhangs above access doors.
E.
Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, reheat coil, exhaust fans, energy recovery
wheels, compressors, and electrical and controls components shall be through hinged
access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel
piano hinges shall be included on the doors.
F.
All access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, impact resistant, rigid polyurethane
foam panels with neoprene gaskets.
G.
Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no
visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance
with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure.
H.
Units shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans.
I.
Unit shall be provided with base discharge and return air openings. All openings
through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2 inch in
height around the opening.
J.
Unit shall include factory installed, painted galvanized steel condenser coil guards on
the face of the condenser coil.
2.4
A.
ROOF CURB
Full-perimeter curb of sheet metal, minimum 24 inches high, neoprene sealing strip,
and welded Z-bar flashing. Curbs shall to be fully gasketed between the curb top and
unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and
air seal for the unit. Curb shall have solid bottom and shall be factory assembled and
fully lined with 1 inch neoprene coated fiberglass insulation and include a wood nailer
strip. (Curb shall be adjustable up to 3/4 inch per foot to allow for sloped roof
applications.)
15733 - 4
LK 13534
2.5
SUPPLY-AIR FAN
A.
Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.
B.
Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balance and mounted on rubber isolators.
C.
Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours
service with external lubrication points.
D.
Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan motors
shall be premium efficiency.
2.6
EXHAUST FANS
A.
Exhaust dampers shall be sized for 100% relief.
B.
Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced.
C.
Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours
service with external lubrication points.
D.
Access to exhaust fans shall be through double wall, hinged access doors with quarter
turn lockable handles.
E.
Unit shall include belt driven, unhoused, backward curved, plenum exhaust fans.
F.
Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan motors
shall be premium efficiency.
2.7
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
B.
Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.
C.
Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently
circuited and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty, from the date of original equipment
shipment form the factory.
D.
Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be
accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors
shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam injected panels to prevent
the transmission of noise outside the cabinet.
E.
Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s
recommended rubber vibration isolators, to reduce any transmission of noise from the
compressors into the building area.
15733 - 5
LK 13534
F.
Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type
refrigerant flow control.
G.
Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and
manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on
both the high pressure and low pressure sides and a factory installed replaceable core
liquid line filter driers.
H.
Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit
which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity.
I.
Lead refrigeration circuit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves,
electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a control signal terminal which
allow the unit to have a dehumidification mode of operation, which includes supply air
temperature control to prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the
space.
J.
Unit shall be configured as an air-source heat pump. Each refrigeration circuit shall be
equipped with a factory installed liquid line filter drier with check valve, reversing valve,
accumulator, and thermal expansion valves on both the indoor and outdoor coils.
Reversing valve shall energize during the heat pump heating mode of operation.
K.
First capacity stage shall be provided with on/off condenser fan cycling and adjustable
compressor lockout to allow cooling operation down to 35°F.
2.8
EVAPORATOR COILS
A.
Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper
tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end
casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.
B.
Coils shall have interlaced circuitry and shall be standard capacity.
C.
Coils shall be helium leak tested.
D.
Coils shall be furnished with factory installed thermostatic expansion valves.
2.9
A.
CONDENSER
Air-Cooled Condenser
1.
Condenser fans shall be a vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive fans.
2.
Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of
copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and
aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.
3.
Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling.
4.
Coils shall be helium leak tested.
15733 - 6
LK 13534
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
2.12
FILTERS
Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30%
and MERV rating of 13, upstream of the cooling coil.
OUTSIDE AIR/ECONOMIZER
Unit shall include 0-100% economizer consisting of a motor operated outside air
damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow
core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades
shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft.
of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the
damper. Damper assembly shall be controlled by spring return
ENERGY RECOVERY
A.
Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The energy
recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor,
drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal
from the cabinet.
B.
The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated
cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt.
C.
Wheel shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal
parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency
ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or
aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting
matrix.
D.
Wheel shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame
construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or
coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments
shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning.
Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours.
Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the
shaft by means of taper locks.
E.
All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly
and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim
drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.
F.
The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized
Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an
Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the cassette
frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal performance
shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84,
15733 - 7
LK 13534
Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-toAir Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the AHRI
Certified Products.
G.
Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty, from the
date of original equipment shipment from the factory. The first 12 months from the date
of equipment startup, or 18 months from the date of original equipment shipment from
the factory, whichever is less, shall be covered under the standard AAON limited parts
warranty. The remaining period of the warranty shall be covered by Airxchange. The 5
year warranty applies to all parts and components of the cassette, with the exception of
the motor, which shall carry an 18 month warranty. Warranty shall cover material and
workmanship that prove defective, within the specified warranty period, provided the
Airxchange written instructions for installation, operation and maintenance have been
followed. Warranty excludes parts associated with routine maintenance, such as belts.
Refer to the Airxchange Energy Recovery Cassette Limited Warranty Certificate.
H.
Unit shall include 4 inch thick, pleated panel outside air filters with an ASHRAE
efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 8, upstream of the wheels.
I.
Hinged service access doors shall allow access to the wheel.
J.
Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently
bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade
desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not
degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal
environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil
cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water
or high humidity.
K.
Unit shall include energy recovery wheel defrost control which includes an adjustable
temperature sensor and timer wired to periodically stop the wheel rotation, which
allows the warm exhaust air to defrost the wheel.
2.13
A.
INDIRECT-FIRED GAS FURNACE
Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with NFPA 54, "National
Fuel Gas Code," and ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces."
1.
B.
AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of AGA.
Burners: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts with a minimum thermal
efficiency of 80 percent.
1.
2.
3.
Fuel: Natural gas.
Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
High-Altitude Model: For Project elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level.
C.
Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
D.
Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
15733 - 8
LK 13534
E.
Safety Controls:
1.
2.
2.14
Gas Control Valve: Electronic modulating.
Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly
containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and
manual shutoff.
CONTROLS
A.
Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller
1.
Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the unit.
Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and factory
tested. Controller shall be capable of stand alone operation with unit
configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and
occupancy scheduling available without dependence on a building management
system.
2.
Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for
occupancy scheduling.
3.
Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values
without the use of a battery, in the event of a power failure.
4.
Make Up Air Controller
a.
Unit shall modulate cooling with constant airflow to meet ventilation outside
air loads. A wall-mounted, space-temperature sensor with adjustment on
remote-control panel shall modulates gas furnace burner and cooling
capacity based on space air temperature.
b.
With modulating hot gas reheat, unit shall modulate cooling and hot gas
reheat as efficiently as possible, to meet outside air humidity loads and
prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the space.
5.
Unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing,
and occupancy scheduling shall be accomplished with connection to interface
module with LCD screen and input keypad, interface module with touch screen,
or with connection to PC with free configuration software. Controller shall be
capable of connection with other factory installed and factory provided unit
controllers with individual unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status
viewing, and occupancy scheduling available from a single unit. Connection
between unit controllers shall be with a modular cable.
6.
Controller shall be capable of communicating and integrating with the existing
Trane Controls System.
B.
Unit shall be provided with a safety shutdown terminal block for field installation of a
smoke detector which shuts off the unit's control circuit. The smoke detector shall be
wired to the existing building fire alarm system.
2.15
A.
SAFETY CONTROLS:
Compressor motor and outside-coil fan motor low ambient lockout.
1.
Overcurrent protection for compressor motor and outside-coil fan motors.
15733 - 9
LK 13534
2.16
ELECTRICAL
A.
Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired, non-fused disconnect
switch.
B.
Air-source heat pump shall include an optimized start defrost cycle to prevent frost
accumulation on the outdoor coil during heat pump heating operation and to minimized
defrost cycle energy usage. If the temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger and/or
the suction line is less than a predetermined value, a deferred defrost cycle is initiated
wherein the defrost cycle starts after a variable, continuously optimizing, time interval
has elapsed. The defrost cycle is terminated when the relative temperatures of the
outdoor heat exchanger and/or the suction line indicate that sufficient frost is melted
from the heat exchanger to insure adequate time between successive defrost cycles
for optimizing the efficiency and reliability of the system, or after a predetermined time
interval has elapsed, whichever condition occurs first. During defrost cycle all
compressors shall energize, reversing valves shall de-energize, and auxiliary heat shall
energize.
C.
Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and factory wired 115V, 13 amp GFI
outlet disconnect switch in the unit control panel.
2.17
A.
MOTORS
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation of
rooftop replacement-air units.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations
of connections before equipment installation.
C.
Examine roof curbs and equipment supports for suitable conditions where rooftop
replacement-air units will be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails on roof structure according to
ARI Guideline B. Install and secure rooftop replacement-air units on rails and
coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Restrained isolation
roof-curb rails are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic
Controls."
15733 - 10
LK 13534
B.
3.3
Install wall- and duct-mounting sensors, thermostats, and humidistats furnished by
manufacturers for field installation. Install control wiring and make final connections to
control devices and unit control panel.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section
"Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply
and return/exhaust ducts to rooftop replacement-air units with flexible duct connectors.
Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Gas Burner Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas
Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with
union, pressure regulator (if required), and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for
burner removal and service.
C.
Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power
wiring, switches, and motor controls.
D.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and perform the following:
1.
Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans.
2.
Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion.
3.
Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
4.
Verify that controls are connected and operable.
5.
Verify that filters are installed.
6.
Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris.
7.
Inspect and adjust vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
8.
Verify bearing lubrication.
9.
Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and
binding.
10. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
11. Start unit.
12. Start refrigeration system when outdoor-air temperature is within normal
operating limits.
13. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
14. Inspect operation of power vents.
15. Purge gas line.
16. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices including
response to smoke detectors by fan controls and fire alarm.
17. Operate unit for run-in period.
18. Calibrate thermostats.
19. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
15733 - 11
LK 13534
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air
dampers.
Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:
a.
Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
b.
Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
c.
Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.
d.
Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Verify operational sequence of controls.
Measure and record the following airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a.
Supply-air volume.
b.
Return/Exhaust-air volume.
c.
Outdoor-air intake volume.
Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a.
Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.
b.
Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outdoor-air
intake.
C.
After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and
adjust belt tension.
D.
Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as
specified above.
E.
Prepare written report of the results of startup services.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.
3.6
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop replacement-air units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
15733 - 12
LK 13534
SECTION 15738
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of
separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed
for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and
electrical characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
15738 - 1
LK 13534
C.
Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D.
Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
E.
Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports,
and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
1.7
A.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
2.
Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
EMI
L.G.
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.
Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp..
15738 - 2
LK 13534
2.2
WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A.
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C.
Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors;
manual-reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection.
D.
Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.
E.
Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1.
F.
2.3
Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection
and permanent lubrication.
Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with
removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting
holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of
casing.
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1.
2.
3.
Compressor Type: Scroll.
Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
C.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D.
Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
E.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
F.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
G.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
H.
Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
15738 - 3
LK 13534
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Sections
"HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."
B.
Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and
evaporator fan, with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compressor time delay.
24-hour time control of system stop and start.
Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
C.
Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned,
dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both
ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices
securely fastened to building structure.
C.
Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick,
reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D.
Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports
specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with
removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
E.
Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect
fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
15738 - 4
LK 13534
D.
3.3
Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power
wiring, switches, and motor controls.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.4
A.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
STARTUP SERVICE
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
3.5
A.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
END OF SECTION
15738 - 5
LK 13534
SECTION 15755
DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
B.
This
Section
includes
factory-assembled
and
tested,
refrigeration-type
dehumidification units with the following operation and optional accessories and
components:
1.
Outside and return-air dampers.
2.
Smoke detectors or firestats.
3.
Energy recovery heat exchangers.
4.
Automatic controls and remote-control panel.
5.
Hot-gas reheat.
Related sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 15 Section “Basic HVAC and Plumbing Requirements”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
C.
1.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and equipment mounting frame.
4.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification (when seismic restraint is required):
Submit certification that dehumidification units, accessories, and components will
15755 - 1
LK 13534
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified."
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D.
Startup report.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For dehumidification units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
F.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
dehumidification units and are based on the specific system indicated.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C.
Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D.
Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
E.
Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of dehumidification units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
15755 - 2
LK 13534
1.7
1.
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Warranty Period for Evaporator Coil: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Filters: Two set(s) of each type of filter specified.
2.
Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-drive fan.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
REFRIGERATION DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS
A.
Description: Factory assembled and tested, complying with ASHRAE 15, "Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration," and designed for roof or slab installation.
1.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Desert Aire
b.
Dectron
c.
Pool-Pak
Casing: Single-wall construction with corrosion-protective coating and exterior bakedenamel powder-coated finish, removable panels hinged access doors with neoprene
gaskets, minimum 3/4-inch thick thermal insulation, stainless-steel fasteners,
knockouts for electrical and piping connections, condensate drain connection, and
lifting lugs.
1.
Exterior finishes shall have passed a 1,000 hour salt spray test per ASTM B117,
and have a minimum 1,000 hours minimum humidity rating, per ASTM D2794.
2.
Exterior finishes shall have a direct impact resistance of 160 in-lbs. and a
minimum flexibility of ¼” mandrel.
3.
Access via removable panels or access doors shall not require the used of tools
to open or remove panels.
4.
Thermal insulation exposed to the conditioned air stream shall be closed cell
elastomeric material. Fibrous insulation materials shall have a continuous vapor
barrier membrane between the insulation and the conditioned air stream.
15755 - 3
LK 13534
C.
Supply and/or Exhaust Fans: Centrifugal, galvanized steel with baked-enamel or
powder-coated finish, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and self-aligning, greaselubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings easily accessible inside the
dehumidification unit casing.
D.
Filters: 2-inch thick, throwaway filter in a factory installed filter rack, with a minimum
efficiency report value of 6 according to ASHRAE 52.2 and 90 percent average
arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1. Filter Rack shall have access door for sideloading of the filter and installed on the top of the unit. Filter shall consist of pleated
synthetic media, wire retainer, bonded to a heavy-duty paperboard frame. The filter
shall also be UL Class 2.
E.
Refrigerant Coils: Copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins; factory
fabricated and tested to comply with ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410; with multiple
refrigerant circuits, seamless-copper headers with brazed connections, and stainlesssteel frame. Coil and fins shall have a polyester coating of all surfaces exposed to the
conditioned air stream. Coils shall have a minimum 300-psigworking-pressure rating
and be factory tested to 450 psig, and to 300 psig while underwater.
F.
Compressors: Hermetic scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators and
crankcase heaters that de-energize during compressor operation; with thermalexpansion valves, filter-dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, and liquidand suction-line service valves.
1.
Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two for compressor capacities more than 7-1/2
tons.
2.
Refrigerant Charge: R-407C, R-410A, or HFC-134a.
3.
Capacity Control:
a.
Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor.
b.
Cycle compressor.
4.
Low-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset after three auto-reset failures.
5.
High-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
6.
Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.
7.
Anti-recycling Timing Device: Prevent compressor restart for five minutes after
shutdown.
8.
Adjustable, Low-Ambient, Head-Pressure Control: Designed to operate at
temperatures as low as 0 deg F by cycling condenser fans and controlling speed
of last fan of each circuit.
9.
Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
G.
Drain Pan: Stainless steel, pitched to comply with ASHRAE 62 or a minimum of 1-1/2
inches to drain connection.
H.
Condenser and Condenser Fans: Galvanized-steel condenser casing complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, and having G90coating designation; with coils having copper
tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Propeller-type fans shall be directly
driven by motors with permanently lubricated bearings.
15755 - 4
LK 13534
I.
Energy-Recovery Heat Exchanger (Pool Heater): Cupronickel, coaxial.
J.
Outside-Air Intake Dampers: Return and/or outside-air intake dampers shall be
factory installed with damper operator and control package. The assembly shall be on
top of the unit.
K.
1.
Leakage: Maximum leakage 1.0 percent at nominal airflow of 400 cfm per ton
with 1-inch wg pressure differential.
2.
Damper Operator: 24-VAC, close coupled, with gear train sealed in oil and with
spring return.
Remote-control panel shall contain controls and indicator lights as follows:
1.
On-off fan switch.
2.
Minimum outside-air damper potentiometer position LCD.
3.
Supply-fan operating indicator light.
4.
Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.
5.
Clogged filter indicator light.
L.
Electrical Convenience Outlet (for units located outdoors): 115-V ac fused, duplex
straight-blade receptacles separately fused and located inside dehumidification unit
casing or in roof-curb perimeter.
M.
Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor shall control and monitor unit.
2.3
1.
Control Outputs: Heating, cooling, and dehumidification.
2.
Discharge-air-, outdoor-air-,
temperature LCD.
3.
Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4.
Filter pressure drop LCD.
5.
Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, and operating mode.
6.
Alarm LCD.
conditioned-space-,
and
control
set-point-
MOTORS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
15755 - 5
LK 13534
B.
Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B.
Concrete Bases: Anchor dehumidification units to concrete base.
C.
3.3
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inchcenters around full perimeter of base.
2.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
3.
Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in
Division 3.
Install dehumidification units on vibration and seismic-control devices. Vibration and
seismic-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls."
1.
Units with Internally Isolated Fans:
concrete bases.
Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
2.
Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete bases using housed-spring isolators
having a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch. Secure units to anchor bolts
installed in concrete bases.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to dehumidification units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible
connectors.
D.
Connect condensate drain pans using minimum NPS 1-1/4copper tubing. Extend to
nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan, and
install clean out at changes in direction.
E.
Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
"Refrigerant Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
F.
Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection
requirements:
15755 - 6
LK 13534
1.
Install ducts to termination in roof-mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate
return-air duct through roof structure and insulate the space between roof and
bottom of unit.
G.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
H.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
I.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
Perform the following final checks before startup:
C.
D.
1.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
3.
Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive
system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5.
Verify lubrication of bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts.
6.
Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
7.
Install clean filters.
8.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
Starting procedures for dehumidification units include the following:
1.
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace malfunctioning motors, bearings, and fan
wheels.
2.
Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3.
Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for dehumidification
unit testing, adjusting, and balancing.
15755 - 7
LK 13534
E.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F.
Startup Report: Report findings during startup.
measures taken, and final results.
3.5
Identify startup steps, corrective
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean dehumidification units internally, on completion of installation, according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and
construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils' entering-air
face.
B.
After completing system installation, testing, and startup service of dehumidification
units, clean filter housings and install new filters.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain dehumidification units. Refer to Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
15755 - 8
LK 13534
SECTION 15762
UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils.
Propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils.
Wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BAS: Building automation system.
B.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
C.
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
D.
TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories for each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
Location and size of each field connection.
Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnished specialties, and accessories.
Location and arrangement of integral controls.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
15762 - 1
LK 13534
C.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based
on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which unit heaters will be attached.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.
D.
Samples for Verification: Finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater and wall and
ceiling heaters indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Airtherm; a Mestek Company.
15762 - 2
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440.
1.
C.
Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.
Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company.
Indeeco.
Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.
QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.
Comply with UL 2021.
Coil Section Insulation: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be
aluminum-foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
D.
Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color
selected by Architect.
1.
Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch-thick, sheet
steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety
chain.
2.
Control Access Door: Key operated.
E.
Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency
reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1.
Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.
2.
Pleated: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.
F.
Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion
noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in
terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature
protection. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured
with stainless-steel hardware.
G.
Fan and Motor Board: Removable.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.
Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or
galvanized-steel fan scrolls.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 15 Sections
"HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."
15762 - 3
LK 13534
I.
Basic Unit Controls:
1.
2.
Control voltage transformer.
Unit mounted] thermostat with the following features.
a.
b.
Heat-off switch.
Fan on-auto switch.
J.
Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection.
K.
Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.
2.2
A.
PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Airtherm; a Mestek Company.
Engineered Air Ltd.
McQuay International.
Rosemex Products.
Ruffneck Heaters; a division of Lexa Corporation.
Trane.
B.
Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge
configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.
C.
Comply with UL 2021.
D.
Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.
E.
Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled
and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.
F.
Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for
vertical units.
G.
Electric-Resistance Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from
expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed
in steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch.
Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not
exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.
1.
2.
H.
Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and
limit controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.
Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.
Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan
venturi.
15762 - 4
LK 13534
I.
Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
J.
Control Devices:
1.
Wall-mounted thermostat.
K.
Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit
heater installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant
materials and applications are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C.
Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
D.
Suspend unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric
hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers
are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
E.
Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at
heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed
control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
15762 - 5
LK 13534
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation
and electrical connections.
Test and adjust controls and safety devices.
Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
ADJUSTING
Adjust initial temperature set points.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters. Refer to Division 1
Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION
15762 - 6
LK 13534
SECTION 15785
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Packaged energy recovery units.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B.
Green Submittals:
1.
C.
Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
D.
Product Data for "Construction IAQ Management Plan": Replacement filtration
media for occupancy.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
Installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include
in maintenance manuals.
15785 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
ARI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall
comply with ARI 1060, "Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment."
C.
ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall
comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
D.
NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed
according to recommendations of NRCA.
E.
UL Compliance: Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in
UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery
Ventilators."
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and
suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition
assemblies.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
1.7
A.
Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.
Fan Belts: One set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
15785 - 2
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FIXED-PLATE TOTAL HEAT EXCHANGERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
RenewAire LLC.
ConsERV.
B.
Casing: Galvanized steel.
C.
Plates: Evenly spaced and sealed and arranged for counter airflow.
1.
Plate Material: Chemically treated paper with selective hydroscopicity and
moisture permeability, and gas barrier properties.
D.
Bypass Plenum: Within casing, with gasketed face-and-bypass dampers having
operating rods extended outside casing.
E.
Disposable Panel Filters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Comply with NFPA 90A.
Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access
doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out
from access plenum.
Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
Thickness: 2 inches.
Initial Resistance: 0.05 inches wg.
Recommended Final Resistance: 0.10 inches wg.
Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 80.
Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 5.
Media:
Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive and
antimicrobial agent.
Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet
side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.
Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats[ with antimicrobial
agent] and held by self-supporting wire grid.
Media-Grid Frame: [Nonflammable cardboard] [Galvanized steel] [Fire-retardant,
3/4-inch particleboard with gaskets].
Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable
for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
15785 - 3
LK 13534
2.2
A.
PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
RenewAire LLC.
ConsERV.
B.
Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and
exterior finish, gasketed and calked weathertight, hinged access doors with neoprene
gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1-inch- thick thermal
insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior drain connection,
and lifting lugs.
C.
Heat Recovery Device: Fixed-plate heat exchanger.
D.
Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with spring isolators and
flexible duct connections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Disposable Panel Filters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Motor and Drive: Belt driven with variable speed drives.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified inDivision 15 Section
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch static deflection.
Comply with NFPA 90A.
Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access
doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out
from access plenum.
Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet
side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.
Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical
conduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during
installation.
1.
2.
3.
Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and
terminal strip.
Include fused disconnect switches.
Variable-speed controller to vary fan capacity from 100 to approximately 50
percent.
15785 - 4
LK 13534
G.
2.3
A.
Accessories:
1.
Duct flanges.
CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
See schedule on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery
equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections
before installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install fixed-plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow as directed
by unit manufacturer.
1.
Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are
specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation
devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
C.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
15785 - 5
LK 13534
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Adjust seals and purge.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C.
Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass
tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.
END OF SECTION
15785 - 6
LK 13534
SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Duct liner.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Division 15 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiberreinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.
Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for
mechanical equipment.
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam
and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.
Static-Pressure Classes: Refer to “Duct Material and Insulation Schedule” on
drawings.
2.
Leakage Class: Refer to “Duct Material and Insulation Schedule” on drawings.
15815 - 1
LK 13534
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, and attachments to other work.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure
classes.
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access
doors and panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and
vibration isolation.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
Sheet metal thicknesses.
Joint and seam construction and sealing.
Reinforcement details and spacing.
Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
Design Calculations: Calculations, for selecting hangers and supports .
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general
construction, building components, and other building services.
Indicate
proposed changes to duct layout.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which duct will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
15815 - 2
LK 13534
d.
e.
f.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum
supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth)
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction:
Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
2.2
A.
DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
15815 - 3
LK 13534
1.
2.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
B.
Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct.
C.
Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth)
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
E.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
F.
Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg Fat 75 deg F
mean temperature.
Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct
without compressing insulation.
Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.
Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.
G.
Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4,
"Traverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
H.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3
A.
SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based
on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
15815 - 4
LK 13534
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and
diameter (diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct).
C.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.
D.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct
and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.
2.
E.
2.4
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded
longitudinal seams.
Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with
butt-welded longitudinal seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and
Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and
duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be
free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
C.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for
exposed ducts.
15815 - 5
LK 13534
D.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish
for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to
view.
E.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;
black and galvanized.
1.
F.
2.5
A.
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce
aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or
EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
DUCT LINER
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and
with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
1)
2.
B.
Insulation Pins and Washers:
1.
2.
C.
Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
2)
Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel
pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized
carbon-steel washer.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness
with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
15815 - 6
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive
metal nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal
joints necessary.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500
fpm.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at
intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness
as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at
uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a.
10.
2.6
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher
than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall
open area of 23 percent.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,
turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat
sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to
duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for
sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
15815 - 7
LK 13534
7.
8.
9.
C.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Service: Indoor and outdoor.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum.
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
E.
Flange Gaskets:
plasticizer.
F.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and
shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated
couplings and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts:
ASTM A 603.
15815 - 8
Galvanized steel complying with
LK 13534
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel,
and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping
device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to
size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other
design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and
for branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment
rooms and enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation
15815 - 9
LK 13534
with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on
four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire
and smoke dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction
Guidelines."
3.2
ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN
HOOD EXHAUST DUCT
A.
Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold
grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.
B.
Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum
intervals of 12 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as
indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 11/2 inches from bottom of duct.
C.
Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes
and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3
A.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing
Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.
1.
For static-pressure classes 1- and 1/2-inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class C, except as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.4
Systems for residential occupancy.
Ducts that are located directly in zones they serve.
Ducts that have short runs from volume-control boxes to diffusers.
Return-air ceiling plenums.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
15815 - 10
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers
and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with
welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a
maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
A.
3.7
PAINTING
Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not
have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanizedsteel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9
painting Sections.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Leakage Tests:
1.
2.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."
Test the following systems:
15815 - 11
LK 13534
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Supply air – low and medium pressure systems.
Return air – low and medium pressure systems.
Exhaust air – low pressure systems.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate
leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
Test for leaks before insulation application.
Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system
or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire
system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for
testing.
Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1.
2.
Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness
according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and
Restoration of HVAC Systems."
a.
Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter
media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1.
2.
D.
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct staticpressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for
insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner
manufacturer. Comply with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for access
panels and doors.
Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with
99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed
from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and
other points of entry into building.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
15815 - 12
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.9
A.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers,
and drive assemblies.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers
and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and
drains.
Coils and related components.
Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling
plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.
Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract
contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces
without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit
duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged,
deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning
materials; comb and straighten fins.
Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if
fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written
instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
DUCT SCHEDULE
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel as indicated in the “Duct Material and
Insulation Schedule” on drawings except as follows:
1.
Commercial Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet, No. 3 finish.
Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.
Welded seams and joints.
Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts:
a.
b.
c.
Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.
Exposed to View: No. 3 finish.
Concealed: No. 2D finish.
15815 - 13
LK 13534
3.
B.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
2.
3.
C.
d.
Welded seams and flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets.
Moist Environment Ducts: Aluminum.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
Stainless-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized sheet steel coated with zinc
chromate.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1)
2)
3)
c.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of
direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1)
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
15815 - 14
LK 13534
2)
3)
b.
c.
D.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a.
b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION
15815 - 15
LK 13534
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
Barometric relief dampers.
Manual volume dampers.
Control dampers.
Fire dampers.
Ceiling dampers.
Smoke dampers.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
Corridor dampers.
Flange connectors.
Turning vanes.
Remote damper operators.
Duct-mounted access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.
Division 15 Section "Intake and Relief Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator
caps.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
1.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other
construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and
15820 - 1
LK 13534
method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Special fittings.
Manual volume damper installations.
Control damper installations.
Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling,
and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted
access doors and remote damper operators.
Duct security bars.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceilingmounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items
involved.
D.
Source quality-control reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
1.5
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
15820 - 2
LK 13534
2.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a
No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and No. 3 finish for exposed ducts.
D.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish
for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
G.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2
A.
BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
B.
Description: Gravity balanced.
C.
Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E.
Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel with welded corners.
F.
Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.
G.
Blade Action: Parallel.
H.
Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.
I.
Blade Axles:
1.
2.
Material: Nonferrous metal.
Diameter: 0.20 inch.
15820 - 3
LK 13534
J.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L.
Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.
M.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
N.
2.3
A.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
Electric actuators.
Chain pulls.
Front of rear screens.
90-degree stops.
Sleeve: Minimum 20-gage thickness.
BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
B.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
C.
Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.
E.
Frame: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners.
F.
Blades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Multiple, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
Maximum Width: 6 inches.
Action: Parallel.
Balance: Gravity.
Eccentrically pivoted.
G.
Blade Seals: Neoprene.
H.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
15820 - 4
LK 13534
I.
Tie Bars and Brackets:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized steel.
Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
J.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K.
Bearings: Synthetic.
L.
Accessories:
1.
2.
2.4
A.
Flange on intake.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
7.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
Bearings:
a.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
15820 - 5
LK 13534
b.
8.
B.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with
flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have
axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have
axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
15820 - 6
LK 13534
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have
axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
Blade Seals: Neoprene.
Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Accessories:
a.
D.
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Hat shaped.
Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
7.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration.
Low-Leakage, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
15820 - 7
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with
flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
7.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
9.
10.
11.
3.
2.
3.
A.
Size: 1-inch diameter.
Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted
on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple-damper assembly.
Damper Hardware:
1.
2.5
Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration.
Jackshaft:
1.
2.
F.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have
axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
Blade Seals: Neoprene.
Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
Accessories:
a.
E.
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zincplated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
CONTROL DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
15820 - 8
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Young Regulator Company.
B.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified
Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
C.
Frames:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Blades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
3.
A.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Bearings:
1.
2.
2.6
Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
Parallel- and opposed- blade design.
Galvanized steel.
0.064 inch thick.
Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.
Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; stainless steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated
steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1.
F.
Hat shaped.
Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
Mitered and welded corners.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
FIRE DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
15820 - 9
LK 13534
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm
velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille
where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper
frame must comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade
connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
2.7
A.
CEILING DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
15820 - 10
LK 13534
8.
9.
B.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
Labeled according to UL 555C by an NRTL.
Comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as
indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
C.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.
D.
Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.
E.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
F.
Fire Rating: 2 hours.
2.8
A.
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an
NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm
velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille
where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
G.
Smoke Detector: Refer to fire alarm drawings for area detection system.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade
connectors.
I.
Leakage: Class I.
J.
Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
15820 - 11
LK 13534
K.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to
suit wall or floor application.
L.
Damper Motors: Two-position action.
M.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
N.
Accessories:
1.
2.
2.9
A.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC
Instrumentation and Controls." Division 16 Sections.
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and
sealed gear trains.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and
breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.
Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to
permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
Auxiliary switches for position indication.
Test and reset switches, remote mounted.
FLANGE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Description:
Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C.
Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
15820 - 12
LK 13534
2.10
A.
TURNING VANES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
METALAIRE, Inc.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with
bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with
perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resinbonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to
blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support
in Elbows."
E.
Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for
larger dimensions.
2.11
REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
2.
Young Regulator Company.
B.
Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.
C.
Tubing: Brass.
D.
Cable: Stainless steel.
E.
Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed, 2 inches deep.
F.
Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Painted Steel – Match surrounding material color.
15820 - 13
LK 13534
2.12
A.
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access
Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Double wall, rectangular.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for
duct pressure class.
Vision panel.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash
locks.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression
latches.
Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles.
Pressure Relief Access Door:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct
pressure class.
Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negativepressure ducts.
Factory set at 10-inch wg.
Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.
Hinge: Continuous piano.
15820 - 14
LK 13534
7.
8.
9.
2.13
A.
Latches: Cam.
Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flame Gard, Inc.
3M.
B.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D.
Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.14
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or
0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
15820 - 15
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
G.
High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors:
rubber.
1.
2.
3.
2.15
A.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
2.
2.16
Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Glass fabric coated with silicone
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
1.
2.
3.
B.
Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including
screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing
instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
15820 - 16
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible
to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct
liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with
nosing at hat channel.
1.
2.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and
maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On both sides of duct coils.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers and equipment.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall
fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible
links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for
access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access
doors installed downstream from dampers.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
Upstream of turning vanes.
Elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
2.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
15820 - 17
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K.
Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
L.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
N.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of
flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
O.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low-pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
P.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
Q.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
R.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment.
Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch
movement during start and stop of fans.
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range
of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator
and damper.
END OF SECTION
15820 - 18
LK 13534
SECTION 15831
FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes fan-coil units with electric-resistance heating and DX cooling
coils.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
C.
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
E.
Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating
and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of
fan-coil units.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing fan-coil units
similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Comply with ARI 440 for testing and rating units.
C.
Comply with ASHRAE 33 for testing air coils.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
15831 - 1
LK 13534
E.
1.5
A.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1.
Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Trane Co.
2.
Bryant
3.
Carrier
4.
Lennox International, Inc.
5.
York International Corp.
6.
Or Approved Equal
MATERIALS
A.
Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges.
B.
Coil Section Insulation:
section.
C.
Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan insulated with
polystyrene or polyurethane insulation.
D.
Cabinet: Galvanized steel with removable panels.
1.
Vertical Unit Front Panels: Galvanized steel with channel-formed edges,
removable for servicing, and with insulation on back of panel.
2.
Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge,
with safety chain.
E.
Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer.
2.3
A.
Faced, heavy-density, glass-fiber insulation over entire
EVAPORATOR COIL
Direct-Expansion Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins.
15831 - 2
LK 13534
B.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
Refrigeration Circuit: A separate circuit for each compressor, with externally equalized
thermal-expansion valve, filter-dryer, and charging valves.
ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS
Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum,
embedded in magnesium-oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high-mass steel or
corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends
are enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F at
any point during normal operation.
1.
Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and
limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
FAN
Centrifugal fan, with forward-curved, double-width wheels of reinforced fiberglass, in
galvanized steel fan scrolls, directly connected to manufacturer's standard motor.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen.
B.
Discharge grille panels fabricated of galvanized steel with stamped integral grilles and
access doors.
C.
Steel subbase, height as indicated.
D.
Plastic motor-oiler tubes extending to beneath top discharge grille.
E.
Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into wall or ceiling.
F.
Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated. Connect motor
to chassis wiring with plug connection.
G.
Filters: 1-inch- thick, throwaway filters in fiberboard frames.
H.
Dampers: Steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade length,
operated by factory-mounted electric operators for 25 percent open cycle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and supports to receive fan-coil units for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
fan-coil units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
15831 - 3
LK 13534
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fan-coil units as indicated, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
NFPA 90A.
B.
Connect fan-coil units and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated
and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws
and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values
for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not
indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening requirements
specified in UL 486A.
C.
Connect fan-coil units to refrigerant piping according to Division 15 Section "Refrigerant
Piping." Provide shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: After installing fan-coil units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
3.4
A.
3.5
CLEANING
Replace filters in each fan-coil unit.
COMMISSIONING
A.
Startup Services:
startup service.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide
B.
Operate fan motor to verify proper rotation.
C.
Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
D.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
END OF SECTION
15831 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Centrifugal roof ventilators.
2.
In-line centrifugal fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Roof curbs.
Fan speed controllers.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1.
2.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
15838 - 1
LK 13534
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
Installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall
bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use
for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.7
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Belts: One sets for each belt-driven unit.
15838 - 2
LK 13534
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Loren Cook Company.
2.
Carnes Company.
3.
JencoFan.
C.
Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1.
2.
Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air
upward, with rain and snow drains and grease collector.
Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance.
D.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
E.
Belt Drives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Resiliently mounted to housing.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less
than 50 percent.
Disconnect Switch: Non-fusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb
base; factory set to close when fan stops.
Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric
actuator; wired to close when fan stops.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
15838 - 3
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
2.2
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.
Overall Height: 12 inches.
Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation.
Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.
Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.
Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides.
Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to fan schedule on drawings.
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
B.
Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet
flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C.
Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch
located on outside of fan housing[;.
D.
Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,
enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings
extended to outside of fan housing.
E.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
2.3
A.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less
than 50 percent.
Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame.
Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to fan schedule on drawings
MOTORS
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
2.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
15838 - 4
LK 13534
B.
2.4
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to
AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with
the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the
AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Support units using Vibration- and seismic-control devices specified in Division 15
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1.
Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast
in concrete base.
C.
Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Division 7
Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D.
Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
F.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G.
Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15
Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified
in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
15838 - 5
LK 13534
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect
switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
Adjust belt tension.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan
to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.
C.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing"
for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
15838 - 6
LK 13534
E.
Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION
15838 - 7
LK 13534
SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.
2.
Louver face diffusers.
3.
Linear slot diffusers.
4.
Adjustable bar registers and grilles.
5.
Fixed face registers and grilles.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied
color finishes.
C.
Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's
standard sizes to verify color selected.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the
items involved:
15855 - 1
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
Duct access panels.
Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS: Refer to schedule on drawings.
2.2
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to
ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,
fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve
design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in
lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or
other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow
service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
15855 - 2
LK 13534
3.3
A.
ADJUSTING
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION
15855 - 3
LK 13534
SECTION 15856
INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of roof-mounting intake and relief ventilators:
1.
Roof hoods.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
1.4
Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for ventilator assemblies provided as
part of the general construction.
Division 15 Section "Power Ventilators" for roof-mounting exhaust fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance: Intake and relief ventilators shall be capable of withstanding
the effects of gravity loads, wind loads, seismic loads, and thermal movements without
permanent deformation of components, noise or metal fatigue, or permanent damage
to fasteners and anchors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For intake and relief ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and ventilator attachments to curbs and curb attachments to roof structure.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
D.
Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.
Sizes and locations of roof openings.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for intake and relief
ventilators.
15856 - 1
LK 13534
E.
1.5
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain ventilators through one source from a single manufacturer
where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B.
Product Options:
Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes
requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic
effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and
in-service performance.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
intake and relief ventilators and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
1.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
1.6
A.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations. These items are specified
in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
15856 - 2
LK 13534
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming
or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish.
E.
Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless
steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined
materials.
1.
2.
Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
F.
Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion
anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load
imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
G.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Factory or shop fabricate intake and relief ventilators to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and
handling. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
C.
Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located
and secured.
D.
Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E.
Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.
2.4
A.
ROOF HOODS
Available Manufacturers:
15856 - 3
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
Aerovent; a Twin City Fan company.
Carnes.
Greenheck.
JencoFan.
Loren Cook Company.
Penn Ventilation.
B.
Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.
C.
Materials: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063-inch- thick base and 0.050-inch- thick
hood; suitably reinforced.
D.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inchthick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer.
Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.
1.
2.
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with] [Built-in cant and] [Built-in
raised cant and mounting flange.
Overall Height: 12 inches.
E.
Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.
F.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:
1.
2.
3.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants.
Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
according to ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic
coating to be applied over it.
Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
Baked-Enamel Finish:
Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat and an overall
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
a.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install intake and relief ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with
adjacent work.
B.
Secure intake and relief ventilators to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Use
concealed anchorages where possible.
15856 - 4
LK 13534
C.
Install intake and relief ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation
progresses. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied
during installation.
F.
Label intake and relief ventilators according to requirements specified in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Identification."
G.
Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by
applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
H.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes
so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in
the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide
new units.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
CONNECTIONS
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15
Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
ADJUSTING
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
END OF SECTION
15856 - 5
LK 13534
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
b.
2.
Balancing Domestic Heating Piping Systems:
a.
1.3
Constant-volume air systems.
Variable-air-volume systems.
Constant-flow hydronic systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
15950 - 1
LK 13534
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation"
Article.
D.
Certified TAB reports.
E.
Sample report forms.
F.
Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB, or
TABB.
1.
2.
B.
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC,
NEBB, or TABB.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC,
NEBB, or TABB as a TAB technician.
TAB Conference: Meet with Architect and Contractors on approval of the TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
The Contract Documents examination report.
The TAB plan.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
TAB reports.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the
procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration:
ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."
15950 - 2
As described in
LK 13534
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire
TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize
conflicts with Owner's operations.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test
dates and times.
B.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,
thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet
the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts"
and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum
walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including
system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
15950 - 3
LK 13534
2.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC
equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to
rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use
tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and
installed conditions.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are
aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with
indicated perforations.
K.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.
L.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
M.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
N.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met.
15950 - 4
LK 13534
3.3
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems" and in this Section.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
2.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and
thickness as used to construct ducts.
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore
insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section
"HVAC Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve
position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with
paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow
measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
15950 - 5
LK 13534
L.
3.5
A.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
a.
2.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and
downstream from duct restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
4.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are
measured.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound
traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced
conditions.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures.
Calculate actual system-effect factors.
Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections for airhandling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated
air-handling-unit performance.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers
and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur.
Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other
operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub-main ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
15950 - 6
LK 13534
1.
Measure airflow of sub-main and branch ducts.
a.
2.
3.
C.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers
rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1.
2.
3.6
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
Remeasure each sub-main and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust sub-main and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
D.
Where sufficient space in sub-main and branch ducts is unavailable for
Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and
inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum
set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow
of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow
terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at
a position that simulates full-cooling load.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed maximum airflow.
Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written
instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the
air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constantvolume air systems.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
15950 - 7
LK 13534
a.
5.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
6.
7.
3.7
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the staticpressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate
static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
Record final fan-performance data.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at
pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved
pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.8
A.
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
Check liquid level in expansion tank.
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest
vent.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at
indicated flow.
Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do
not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless
several terminal valves are kept open.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing
device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Measure water flow at pumps.
displacement pumps:
1.
Use the following procedures except for positive-
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at
zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
15950 - 8
LK 13534
a.
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across
the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
a.
3.
4.
If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain
approval from Architect and comply with requirements in Division 15
Section "Hydronic Pumps."
Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors
in overload conditions.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower
for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare
calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report
conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
C.
Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in
fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flowpressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
F.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow
that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
G.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over
indicated flow.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage,
rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air
temperature.
I.
Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of
balancing.
J.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
15950 - 9
LK 13534
3.9
A.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.10
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer,
model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A.
Verify proper rotation of fans.
B.
Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C.
Record compressor data.
3.11
A.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
Water flow rate.
Water pressure drop.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Nameplate data.
Airflow.
Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental
stage.
Calculated kilowatt at full load.
Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
15950 - 10
LK 13534
C.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.12
A.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
3.13
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Inlet steam pressure.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10
percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Domestic Hot Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents
as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices.
Recommend changes and additions to systems'
balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing.
Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to
allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for
each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.14
A.
FINAL REPORT
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate
sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
2.
B.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed
by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
15950 - 11
LK 13534
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Pump curves.
Fan curves.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop
Drawings and product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated
values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
Water and steam flow rates.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
Terminal units.
15950 - 12
LK 13534
6.
7.
E.
Balancing stations.
Position of balancing devices.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
F.
Unit identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Unit arrangement and class.
Discharge arrangement.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
inches.
Number, make, and size of belts.
Number, type, and size of filters.
Total air flow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Outdoor airflow in cfm.
Return airflow in cfm.
Outdoor-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
Vortex damper position.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1.
Coil Data:
a.
System identification.
15950 - 13
LK 13534
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
G.
Location.
Coil type.
Number of rows.
Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
Make and model number.
Face area in sq. ft..
Tube size in NPS.
Tube and fin materials.
Circuiting arrangement.
Air flow rate in cfm.
Average face velocity in fpm.
Air pressure drop in inches wg.
Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Water flow rate in gpm.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
Inlet steam pressure in psig.
Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory
startup equipment reports, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Fuel type in input data.
Output capacity in Btu/h.
Ignition type.
Burner-control types.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
15950 - 14
LK 13534
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
H.
Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed
in central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
System identification.
Location.
Coil identification.
Capacity in Btu/h.
Number of stages.
Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
Rated amperage.
Air flow rate in cfm.
Face area in sq. ft..
Minimum face velocity in fpm.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
I.
Total air flow rate in cfm.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Air temperature differential in deg F.
Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.
Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.
Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
Manifold pressure in psig.
High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.
Operating set point in Btu/h.
Motor voltage at each connection.
Motor amperage for each phase.
Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
Heat output in Btu/h.
Air flow rate in cfm.
Air velocity in fpm.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
15950 - 15
LK 13534
f.
g.
h.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
K.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
inches.
Number, make, and size of belts.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
J.
Arrangement and class.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
inches.
System and air-handling-unit number.
Location and zone.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
Duct size in inches.
Duct area in sq. ft..
Indicated air flow rate in cfm.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
Actual air flow rate in cfm.
Actual average velocity in fpmm/s).
Barometric pressure in psig.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Apparatus used for test.
Area served.
Make.
Number from system diagram.
15950 - 16
LK 13534
g.
h.
i.
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
L.
Air flow rate in cfm.
Air velocity in fpm.
Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
Final air flow rate in cfm.
Final velocity in fpm.
Space temperature in deg F.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
System and air-handling-unit identification.
Location and zone.
Room or riser served.
Coil make and size.
Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
M.
Type and model number.
Size.
Effective area in sq. ft..
Air flow rate in cfm.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump
curves and include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Unit identification.
Location.
Service.
Make and size.
Model number and serial number.
Water flow rate in gpm.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
Pump rpm.
Impeller diameter in inches.
Motor make and frame size.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
15950 - 17
LK 13534
m.
n.
o.
p.
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
N.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A.
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
INSPECTIONS
Initial Inspection:
1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly
check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final
test and balance readings documented in the final report.
Check the following for each system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Static head in feet of head or psig.
Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
Actual impeller size in inches.
Full-open flow rate in gpm.
Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final water flow rate in gpm.
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
1.
3.15
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Seal type.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
Final Inspection:
1.
After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies
that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final
report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.
15950 - 18
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB
Work fails, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
D.
3.16
The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in
the presence of Architect.
Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to
be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be
accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented
in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall
be noted as "FAILED."
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing
shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and
balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and
request a second final inspection.
If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of
another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract
Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's
final payment.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced
conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak
summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and
winter conditions.
END OF SECTION
15950 - 19
LK 13534
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
1.3
WOR K I N CL UD E D
A.
Work covered by this specification shall include furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and services required to construct and install the complete electrical
system shown on accompanying plans and specified herein.
B.
This work shall include: The general layout of the complete electrical system;
arrangement of feeders, circuits, outlets, switches, controls, panelboards, service
equipment, fixtures, and other work. No rough-in or connection, etc., for
Mechanical Equipment shall be done until coordination is completed with Division
15 Contractor.
RELATED WORK
A.
1.4
1.5
The general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 1 General Requirements, and Instructions to Bidders apply
to the Work included in this Division.
The Contractor shall be familiar with any work specified elsewhere in these
specifications. He shall perform this work as if specified herein.
PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Contractor shall give all necessary notices; obtain all permits, and pay all
governmental taxes, fees and other costs in connection with his work; file all
necessary plans; prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all
governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain required Certificates of
Inspection for his work and deliver same to the Architect-Engineer before request
for acceptance and final payment of work.
B.
Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner•, all labor,
materials, services, apparatus, drawings, etc. necessary to comply with all laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on the drawings and/or
in the specifications.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The following specifications and standards, of issues listed below, but referred
to thereafter by basic designation only, form part of these specifications:
1.
National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA-70.
2.
National Fire Protection Association's Recommended Practices.
3.
Local, City and State Codes and Ordinances.
4.
National Electrical Safety Code.
16000 - 1
LK 13534
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
B.
1.6
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
State Fire Prevention Code.
Occupational Health Safety Act (OSHA).
Service Requirements of serving utility company.
Life Safety Code - NFPA 101.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
The latest specifications and standards available shall be used for the above.
REVIEW OF MATERIALS
A.
It is the intent of these Specifications to establish quality standards of materials
and equipment installed. Therefore, specific items are identified by manufacturer,
trade name or catalog designation.
B.
Submit manufacturer's catalog sheets and/or shop drawings covering all
phases of work included in this contract, in accordance with Section 01340 of
this Specification.
C.
Submittals shall be arranged in sets and bound. Material shall be organized into
indexed sections corresponding to specification sections. No loose sheets will be
acceptable. All data shall be submitted at one time. Partial submittals will not be
accepted for review.
D.
All submittals shall bear written certification to the effect that the Contractor has
examined them and found them to be in accordance with Specifications and to
be dimensionally correct with reference to available space and to related trades.
Each submittal shall be signed and dated by the Division 16 Contractor.
E.
Submittals are required even when equipment being furnished is exactly as
specified. Each sheet of submitted data shall be thoroughly edited to clearly
indicate which features and/or options are being proposed.
F.
Substitution of equipment shall be in accordance with Supplementary General
Conditions of this Specification. Refer to Section 01630.
G.
Any proposed substitutions of equipment shall be accompanied by shop
drawings showing revised equipment layouts and wiring diagrams. Where
substituted equipment furnished requires use of larger, more, or differently
arranged connections, such connections shall be installed to the complete
satisfaction of Architect-Engineer without additional cost to Owner.
16000 - 2
LK 13534
1.7
H.
Should a substitution be accepted and subsequently proven unsatisfactory for
the service intended within the warranty period, the contractor shall replace this
material or equipment with that as originally specified, or corrected as directed by
the Architect-Engineer.
I.
Where substitutions alter the design or space requirements indicated on the
drawings, the Contractor shall include all items of cost for the revised design and
include cost of all allied trades involved.
J.
Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect-Engineer. If requested by the Architect-Engineer, the
Division Contractor shall submit for inspection samples of both the specified and
proposed substitute items.
K.
In all cases where substitutions are permitted, the Contractor shall bear any extra
cost of evaluating the equality of the material and the equality of the material and
the equipment to be installed.
L.
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect-Engineer, detailed dimensioned shop
drawings covering all items of electrical equipment. No equipment should be put
into manufacture or ordered until these shop drawings or brochures have been
reviewed by the Architect-Engineer.
M.
In the event resubmittal is required, the Contractor shall revise the shop drawings
as directed by the Architect-Engineer. The Contractor shall then resubmit the
corrected shop drawings to the Architect-Engineer for final review.
N.
Upon completion of the Project, this Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Architect-Engineer 1 set of reproducible "RECORD SET" drawings, showing
actual installed locations of all electrical conduits, ducts, and cables outside and
inside of the buildings, including the location of all underground junction boxes,
pull boxes, or handholes. Make all necessary field measurements during the
installation of the electrical work. Refer to Section 01700.
DEVIATIONS
A.
The drawings, which constitute an integral part of this contract, shall indicate
the general layout of the complete electrical systems; arrangement of feeders,
circuits, outlets, switches, controls, panelboards, service equipment, fixtures
and other work.
B.
Field verification of scale dimensions on the drawings is directed since actual
locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
C.
The Contractor shall check Architectural, structural, plumbing, and heating and
ventilating drawings to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic
changes from original drawings be necessary to resolve such conflicts, the
Contractor shall notify the Architect-Engineer and secure written approval and
agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started.
16000 - 3
LK 13534
D.
1.8
The drawings may be superseded by later revised or detailed drawings or
specification addenda prepared by the Architect-Engineer, and the Contractor
shall conform to all reasonable changes without extra cost to the Owner. All
items not specifically mentioned in the specifications or noted on the drawings,
but which are obviously or normally necessary to make a complete working
installation, shall be included.
SITE UTILITIES
A.
Locations and elevations of various utilities, included within the scope of this
work, have been obtained from existing plans and/or other substantially
reliable sources, and are offered as a general guide only without guarantee as
to accuracy. This Contractor shall examine the Site and verify to his own
satisfaction the locations and elevations of all utilities and shall adequately
inform himself of their relations to the work before entering into contract.
B.
Before ordering equipment and starting the job, this Contractor shall verify the
voltage with the utility company. If voltage differs from that noted on the drawings
and in the specifications, the Architect-Engineer shall be notified at once. If the
Architect-Engineer is not notified before equipment is ordered or construction is
started, this contractor shall provide an acceptable and operable system at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C.
Exterior utilities shall include all conduit and appurtenances outside of the
building or as shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise noted, utilities shall
include complete tie-in with utility lines at no extra cost to the Owner. The
Contractor shall pay all costs required by utility company pertaining to
construction and tie-in. Any deposits required for permanent service will be paid
by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
All material and equipment shall be new and of the best quality normally used in good
commercial practice, being products of reputable manufacture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
The Owner shall retain the right to reject any materials and/or workmanship not in
accordance with those specified, either before or after installation.
END OF SECTION
16000 - 4
LK 13534
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
The general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 1 General Requirements, and Instructions to Bidders apply
to the Work included in this Division.
LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Unless otherwise required or specified under another section of these
Specifications, cutting and patching will be performed by the General Contractor.
This Contractor shall furnish sketches showing locations and sizes of all
openings, chases, etc., required for the installation of his work.
B.
This Contractor shall furnish and locate sleeves and inserts required before
floors and walls are built or he shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and
patching required where such sleeves and inserts are not installed or where
incorrectly located. This Contractor shall do all drilling required for installation
of his hangers.
C.
Any and all penetrations of fire and/or smoke rated walls, partitions, floors,
and/or ceilings shall be accomplished in such a manner as to maintain the
integrity of the fire rating and to meet U.L. requirements. Any and all such
penetrations shall be done in a manner acceptable to the local fire officials. Any
and all penetrations shall be sealed with a material such as Dow Corning Fire
Stop or other material as may be directed by the local fire official. Contractor
shall carefully plan work in advance. Refer to architectural drawings for
locations and ratings of various building elements.
D.
No cutting shall be permitted to any of the structural members without the written
permission of the Architect-Engineer.
E.
Where openings are cut to permit installation of work, or cut to repair or remodel,
any defects that may appear up to expiration of guarantee, patching shall be
done by the trade whose work is disturbed, but shall be paid for by the Contractor
cutting openings or causing the damage.
F.
The General Contractor shall furnish all foundations and supports required for
electrical equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish an approved layout of
bases and supports to the General Contractor.
G.
In general, all floor mounted equipment shall be installed on raised concrete
bases, Concrete bases shall be not less than 4" high unless otherwise noted, and
shall be poured in forms built of new dressed lumber. Foundation corners shall
be neatly chamfered by means of sheet metal or triangular wood strips nailed to
the form. Foundation bolts shall be placed in forms when concrete is poured;
16050 - 1
LK 13534
bolts shall be correctly located by means of templates. Allow 1" below equipment
bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and
the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum.
H.
The Electrical Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades, furnishing,
in writing, to the Architect-Engineer, any information necessary to permit work
of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible
interference or delay.
I.
Where work of this Contractor will be installed close to work of other trades, or
where there is evidence that work of this Contractor will interfere with work of
other trades, this Contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make
satisfactory adjustment. If a Contractor installs his work before coordinating with
other trades, he shall make necessary changes in his work to correct the
condition without extra charge.
J.
This Contractor shall keep his work area clean at all times. All scraps and debris
shall be removed from work area. If this Contractor does not maintain his area,
the General Contractor shall clean this area and back-charge this Contractor.
K.
It shall be the responsibility of each bidder to visit the project site to acquaint
himself with existing conditions prior to submitting a bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Each item of equipment furnished under these Specifications is to be essentially
the standard product of the manufacturer; however, component parts of
equipment need not be products of one manufacturer.
B.
All material and equipment shall be new and of the best quality normally used in
good commercial practice, being products of reputable manufacture. Each major•
component shall bear a name plate stating name and address of the
manufacturer and catalog number or designation. All materials shall be of the
manufacturer's latest design standard, and bear Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Label and the manufacturer's trade mark.
C.
Where items of equipment and/or apparatus come under the following
general headings, all of the equipment shall be from the same manufacturer:
1.
Circuit breakers, panelboards, safety switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All electrical construction work shall be installed under the direction of a
competent supervisor who will be at the job site at all times when electrical
installations are being made.
16050 - 2
LK 13534
B.
Installing Contractor will be held responsible for damage to other work resulting
from negligence of his workmen. Such repairs shall be performed by the trade
originally accomplishing the work but at the expense of this Contractor.
C.
This Contractor shall utilize only competent and skillful workmen in handling and
installing equipment specified.
D.
Installation shall be carried out in such a manner that the many components
will function as a complete workable system including any accessories
required to accomplish such installation. Equipment shall be left properly
adjusted and in satisfactory working order. Work is to be executed in
conformity with best acceptable standard practices with the equipment being
installed to allow for maximum accessibility and best appearance.
Installation shall be such that future installations and expansion can be
made with a minimum of expenditure.
E.
Where possible, work must be scheduled for accomplishment during periods
acceptable to the Owner, but when such scheduling is not feasible, work
shall be executed at night or over week ends. No additional compensation
will be allowed for overtime.
F.
Apparatus which is too large to permit access through stairways, doorways, or
shafts shall be brought to the job site by the contractor involved and put in place
before the closing of the structure.
G.
The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of electrical
apparatus from damage and the elements. This shall include the erection of
temporary shelters, cribbing, and the covering of apparatus in incompleted
areas of buildings with tarpaulins. Failure to comply with the foregoing by the
contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer will be sufficient cause
for rejection of the piece of apparatus in question.
H.
Chases, recesses, and other openings required for the location of conduits or
equipment in new construction shall be provided by the General Contractor. This
Contractor shall advise the General Contractor of the size and locations, and
furnish all necessary drawings required for his work in sufficient time to allow forprovision of chase.
I.
After installation is complete, and at such time as the Architect-Engineer may
direct, this Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. Equipment
shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification. Test shall be performed in the presence of the Architect-Engineer
or authorized representative. This Contractor shall furnish instruments and
personnel required for the test and Owner will furnish necessary electrical power.
J.
Test each circuit with a "meggar" tester to verify that all insulation values conform
to NEC requirements. Check each motor controller to ensure that properly sized
overload devices are installed. Test, check, and adjust all other• systems as
required to ensure proper operation. Provide instruction to Owner's personnel as
to proper operation and maintenance of each system.
16050 - 3
LK 13534
K.
3.2
3.3
The Contractor shall furnish a written certificate guaranteeing materials,
equipment, and labor furnished to be free of defects for a period of 1 year, except
where otherwise indicated, from and after the date of final acceptance of the
work by the Owner, and further agrees that if defects appear within stipulated
guaranty period same shall be replaced or made good without charge.
(Exception: Lighting fixture lamps.)
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Deliver to the Architect, for the Owner's use, three (3) complete operating and
maintenance manuals covering all equipment and systems installed by this
Division.
B.
Include parts lists, wiring diagrams, and operating instructions for all operating
equipment as well as approved submittals.
C.
Brochures shall be bound in hard back three ring binder and tab indexed. Label
front cover and back spline indicating project name. Include page showing date
and local responsible vendors with addresses and telephone numbers for
furnishing parts and equipment information.
TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS
A.
Provide typewritten reports to Owner's representative indicating time, personnel
involved and other pertinent data for testing of fire alarm system and other
special systems.
B.
Provide copies of all test or inspection reports by public agencies for electrical
system.
3.4
Where installations are to be made "in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations", it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain, and maintain
on file at the project site, a copy of said recommendations.
3.5
The Project Manual and project drawings are to be used together to describe the
project. Any item contained in either shall be considered as being contained in
both. In the even to discrepancies or conflicts, this contractor shall immediately
notify the Architect-Engineer, in writing.
3.6
PAINTING:
A.
Provide a prime coat of paint for all supports, hangers, frames and other
materials not having a factory-applied finish. Paint and application methods shall
be as described in Section 09900.
B.
Where factory-applied finishes become scratched or chipped, repair surfaces
utilizing "touch up" materials obtained from the manufacturer.
16050 - 4
LK 13534
3.7
Mounting heights indicated on the drawings are the centerline height of the outlet or
device above the finished floor. Where outlets are indicated to be installed above
counter tops, coordinate with millwork drawings to ensure that there will be no conflicts
with cover plates and back splashes.
3.8
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
3.9
Provide all trenching and backfill as required for the placement of work
required under this Division. All trenching shall be performed in accordance with
the requirements of Section 02200.
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
A.
It shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 contractor to obtain a
dimensioned rough-in drawing from the actual kitchen equipment vendor prior to
roughing in of electrical services.
B.
Provide all disconnecting means for all equipment as required by code, whether
or not shown on the drawings. Exercise planning and care to insure that
disconnects remain accessible after installation of equipment is complete.
Provide all final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment
actually installed.
C.
Receptacles on conduit stub-ups from floor shall be duplex type, 20 ampere,
GFCI, installed in cast metal boxes with threaded hubs and weatherproof cover.
Bottom of box shall be 4" above finished floor unless equipment above requires
box to be mounted closer to the floor,
END OF SECTION
16050 - 5
LK 13534
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2". No more than 4 No. 12 conductors shall be pulled in
1/2" conduit. For conductors larger than No. 12, 3/4" conduit shall be the minimum size.
Other sizes shall be as indicated on the plans, or as required by the NEC for number
and size of conductors installed.
1.2
All conduit shall be of standard sizes and each length shall bear Underwriters
Laboratories Label and manufacturer's trade mark.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Rigid steel conduit shall be National Electric Products Company, or approved equal;
galvanized mild steel, specially selected with reference to uniformity of thickness and
freedom from defects. Fittings shall be zinc-coated, threaded type.
2.2
Electrical metallic tubing raceways, where permitted, shall be U.L. Listed and as
manufactured by Jones & Laughlin Conduit Products or approved equal. Couplings and
connectors shall be compression type, raintight, U.L. Listed for 1/2" through 2" conduit;
set-screw or compression type for 2-1/2" and larger conduit. Couplings and connectors
shall be made up tight and snug. INDENTER TYPE FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED.
All fittings shall be zinc or cadmium plated.
Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC) shall be Type 40, heavy wall or Type 80 extra
heavy wall as manufactured by Carlon Products or approved equal.
2.3
2.4
Flexible steel conduit shall be used to connect all motors and other moving electrical
equipment. Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit, type U.A. as manufactured by Anaconda or
approved equal, shall be used in damp locations where flexible conduit is required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Conduit run in finished areas of building shall be concealed in floor, wall, ceiling,
above or behind furring, or as noted on the drawings. Contractor shall avail himself of
Architectural and Structural drawings for information relating to slab thickness,
reinforcing, finish lines, chases, tunings, ceiling construction and finishes, and shall be
guided accordingly in installation of his work. In unfinished areas, conduit is to be run
concealed where construction permits; otherwise, it may be run exposed. Exercise
particular care in routing and grouping exposed conduit to present neat and workmanlike
appearance with all lines running parallel with or perpendicular to building lines, giving
due attention to ducts, pipe and other interferences. Exercise extreme care in laying out
electrical work to insure that ceiling outlets are located symmetrically within areas and
with respect to air conditioning, heating and ventilating outlets, tile patterns, finishes, etc.
Any errors shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2
All field bends shall be made with standard tools and equipment manufactured
especially for this purpose. Field-cut threads shall be protected with zinc-rich paint prior
to installation.
16110 - 1
LK 13534
3.3
Where embedded conduits cross building expansion joints, the Contractor shall
furnish and install an offset expansion joint or a sliding expansion joint. Sliding
expansion joints shall be provided with bonding strap and clamp. Where conduits are
exposed, provide expansion fittings or flexible conduit as required.
3.4
Flexible conduit shall be used for connection on all motor terminal boxes to conduit
stubs or outlets.
3.5
Flexible conduit shall be used for connection of control equipment requiring piping,
such as solenoid valves, pressure controls, etc.
3.6
Where lighting fixtures require flexible conduit connections to junction boxes, use
"greenfield," maximum length shall be 6 feet.
3.7
Where conduits are run individually, they shall be supported by straps or by using 1/4"
galvanized rods or No. 8 galvanized wire with clips equal to Caddy "Kon Clips". The
hangers shall be secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry; expansion
shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry;
machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces; and wood screws on wood construction.
The use of perforated strap or steel tie-wire will not be permitted. One hole strap may
be utilized on conduits sized 1-inch and smaller. Two hole straps shall be used on
larger conduits.
3.8
Where multiple conduits are run horizontally at the same elevation and grade, they
maybe supported on trapezes or channels suspended on rods. Trapeze members,
including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for number, size and loaded weight of
conduits to be supported.
3.9
Lay out and install conduit runs to avoid proximity to hot water piping. In no case run
conduit within 3" of such piping.
3.10
Conduits entering panelboards, pull boxes, support boxes or outlet boxes shall be
secured in place by galvanized steel lock-nuts and bushing.
3.11
Conduit joints shall be made tight with approved couplings; turns and offsets made
with long sweep ells or bends. Ends of conduit are to be cut square, reamed and
brought butt-to-butt in couplings.
3.12
Bends in conduit shall be made with an approved bending device and conduit bends
or off-sets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured is not to be
installed. Field bends and offsets shall be uniform and symmetrical. Install factory
elbows on 2" and above conduit.
3.13
Conduit not embedded in concrete, all vertical risers, etc. shall be firmly secured by
means of approved pipe clamps, hangers, etc. Run conduit without sags and pockets
and in general drain or pitch toward boxes. Where conduit crosses building expansion
joints, provide expansion fittings and approved ground jumper.
3.14
Where conduits are supported under exposed steel beams or bar joists, approved type
beam clamps and/or clamp/hangers shall be used.
16110 - 2
LK 13534
3.15
Conduit system(s) shall be electrically and mechanically continuous. Conduit system
shall be bonded throughout.
3.16
All hangers shall be so located as to properly grade and support horizontal conduits
without appreciable sagging of these lines. (See Articles 346 and 348, NEC). All conduit
shall be of standard size and each length shall bear Underwriters Laboratories Label and
manufacturer's trademark.
3.17
Where lines of different Contractors are racked on same supporting structures, each
Contractor shall cooperate with the other trades involved to properly locate supporting
members, and shall furnish a proportionate share of labor and materials involved in
same installation; also shall cooperate with other trades so that the same type hanger
is used throughout.
3.18
Conduit shall be kept corked and dry during construction and shall be swabbed out
before wires are pulled into conduit.
3.19
Rigid PVC may be used for the following applications:
3.20
A.
Outdoors and underground for:
1.
Electrical Primary Service
2.
Electrical Secondary Service
3.
Telephone Service Entrance
4.
Electrical Branch Circuits
B.
Under Slab on Grade: PVC conduits may be run under, but not embedded in,
slab on grade. Each conduit shall transition to rigid steel ells before turning
vertically up through grade slab. Exposed PVC conduit emerging from floors will
not be permitted.
C.
In outdoor installations, PVC conduits shall not be installed under parking lots,
driveways or other paved areas except pedestrian sidewalks no more than five
feet in width, unless encased in concrete. Encasement must be approved in
advance by Architect-Engineer.
D.
All joints shall be made watertight using fittings and other materials as
recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
Empty Conduit Systems
A.
Where empty conduit systems are indicated, provide all raceways, junction
boxes, outlet boxes, and appurtenant devices as indicated or as required for a
complete system.
B.
In each "empty" conduit, provide a 9-gauge galvanized pull wire. Leave 12 inches
slack wire at each end.
C.
Identify raceways above furred ceilings and in unfinished spaces every 20 feet.
D.
Empty raceway systems shall be provided for:
1.
Telephones (refer to Section 16740)
16110 - 3
LK 13534
2.
Television Antenna (refer to Section 16780)
3.21
Conduits below grade shall be installed a minimum of 24 inches below finished
grade.
3.22
Galvanized rigid conduit shall be used in damp locations, buried in earth, and in
concrete. In damp locations, joint compound shall be applied to the threads to make
watertight. Electric metallic tubing may be used for branch circuits where galvanized
rigid conduit is not required.
END OF SECTION
CONDUITS
16110 - 4
LK 13534
16110
-4
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
All wire and cable for feeder circuits shall conform to the latest requirements of the
current edition of the NEC and shall meet all ASTM Specifications. Wire and cable shall
be new manufacture; shall have size, grade of insulation, voltage and manufacturer's
name permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals; shall be delivered in
complete coils or reels with identifying size and insulation tags.
1.2
Wire and cable shall be suitably protected from weather and damage during storage
and handling and shall be in first- class condition when installed. Conductors shall be
soft-drawn copper with insulation and outer covering as noted. Conductor sizes shall be
Standard American Wire Gage sizes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Insulation on low voltage conductors shall be Type THW or THWN. All 600-volt
conductors in conduits or other raceways where encased in concrete on grade, where
installed below grade, or where exposed to moisture, shall have moisture- resistant type
insulation. Lighting and receptacle branch circuit conductors shall be Type
THHN/THWN. (See Section 16500 for Fixture Wiring.)
2.2
Conductors No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be No.
12 AWG unless otherwise indicated. Conductors terminating at vibrating or moving
equipment shall be stranded, regardless of size.
2.3
Where taps and splices are necessary and approved, they shall he made in approved
splice boxes, wireways, manholes, etc. with suitable connectors as recommended by
wire and cable manufacturer.
2.4
Where conductors are to be connected to metallic surfaces, the coated surfaces of
the metal shall be polished before installing the connector. Lacquer coating of conduits
shall be removed where ground clamps are to be installed.
2.5
Wire and cable shall be factory color-coded by integral pigmentation, with a separate
color for each conductor and neutral conductor. The color code indicated shall be used
consistently throughout the Electrical System installation, unless specified to the contrary
in another section of these Specifications for that system. Color coding for #8 and larger
conductors may be by means of colored tape, applied in overlapping layers to each
conductor at each outlet, cabinet, junction, or termination. Tape shall cover at least 6
inches of the conductor and shall not loosen or change color with age.
16120 - 1
LK 13534
2.6
COLOR CODE
A.
Color code for lighting and power conductors shall be as follows:
PHASES
120/208
Volts
3-Phase
PHASE A BLACK
PHASE B RED
PHASE C BLUE
NEUTRAL WHITE
GROUND GREEN
B.
Signal, fire alarm, intercommunication, control system and any other such system
wiring shall be appropriately color coded to facilitate checking and circuit
identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
All electrical conductors shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise noted. No
conductors or cables shall be installed in conduits, ducts, or raceways until the
raceway system has been completed. When installing conductors, the Electrical
Contractor shall exercise due care to prevent damage to conductor or insulation.
Only approved cable lubricants shall be used when necessary. All feeder cables shall
be continuous from origin to panel or equipment termination without running splices
in intermediate pull or splice boxes. Unless otherwise noted, each conduit raceway
shall contain only those conductors constituting a single feeder circuit or branch
circuits as shown on the drawings.
3.2
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all hangers, racks, cable cleats and
supports required to make a neat and substantial cable installation.
END OF SECTION
16120 - 2
LK 13534
SECTION 16125
PULLING CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
All cables shall be pulled in a good workmanship manner using approved methods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
An approved commercial lubricant, not a petroleum grease, shall be used unless
otherwise specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Feed cable straight into the conduit by hand, or for large conductors, over a large
diameter sheave avoiding short bends, sharp devices and "cross-overs." Remove all
lashings used for temporary bunching of individual wires before they enter the conduit.
Leadout wires at all pull boxes and conduits, feeding them in again for• the next run.
Cable shall not be pulled around short right-angle bends. See National Electrical Code
(NEC).
END OF SECTION
16125 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16131
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Furnish and install pull boxes where necessary in the raceway system to facilitate
conductor installation.
1.2
Where indicated on the plans and where necessary to terminate, tap-off or redirect
multiple conduit runs, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install appropriately
designed junction boxes.
1.3
All boxes shall be made of galvanized steel, or as specified, of metal gage and
physical size as required by the NEC for the number and size of conduits and
conductors involved. Boxes shall have removable screw covers for flush or surface
installation as indicated on the plans. Boxes shall be securely mounted to the building
structure with supporting facilities independent of the conduits entering or leaving the
boxes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (As specified elsewhere)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
In general, conduit runs of more than 100'-0", or with more than 3 right-angle bends,
shall have a pull box installed at a convenient intermediate location. All such pull boxes
shall be indicated on the Contractor's "RECORD SET" Drawings.
END OF SECTION
16131 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16134
OUTLET BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
All outlet boxes shall be standard galvanized steel type, at least 1-1/2" deep, single or
gang style type of size to accommodate devices noted. Outlet boxes shall be equipped
with plaster ring or cover as necessary.
1.2
The Electrical Contractor shall study all plans relative to the spaces surrounding each
outlet in order that his work may fit the work of Others; and, that when fixture outlets
or controls are installed, they will be symmetrically located and best-suited for each
condition. Outlet boxes located in the concrete, damp places or exposed to the
weather shall be of the cast-metal type having threaded hubs. Each outlet box shall
have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in
accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Outlet boxes shall
be not less than 1-1/2" deep, unless shallower boxes are required by structural
conditions and are specially-approved by the Architect-Engineer. Ceiling and bracket
outlet boxes shall not be less than 4" octagonal except that smaller boxes may be used
where required by the particular fixture to be installed. All ceiling and bracket outlets,
where required, shall be equipped with a 3/8" fixture stud, installed through the back of
the box and not dependent on its mounting bolts for its support. The fixture stud shall
be securely fastened to the box to prevent turning. Boxes shall be rigidly supported
from a structural member of the building, either directly or by using a metal or wood
brace per Article 370 of the NEC.
1.3
Switch boxes shall be 1, 2, 3, etc. gangs as required. Sectional switch boxes shall
not be used. Outlet boxes for special equipment such as electrical thermostat controls
and signal circuits, clocks, etc. shall be suitable for the equipment and service intended,
but shall be not less than 4" square and 2" deep. Suitable covers designed for the
equipment served shall be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Outlet boxes for telephone and signaling systems shall be of the utility type.
2.2
Outlet boxes shall be zinc-coated or cadmium plated sheet steel suitable for the
conditions of each outlet; "Raco" or approved equal.
2.3
Boxes located outdoors shall be cast type, as manufactured by Appleton, CrouseHinds, or approved equal. Cover plate shall be cast in use type.
2.4
Outlet boxes for GFCI receptacles shall be 4" square with single gang plaster ring and
coverplate.
16134 - 1
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Boxes installed in concealed locations shall be set flush with the finish surfaces and
shall be provided with the proper type extension rings or plaster covers where
required. Outlets in plaster walls shall be equipped with plaster rings except as
otherwise noted or specified. Boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory
manner and shall be fastened directly with wood screws on wood; bolts and
expansion shields on concrete or brick; toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; and,
machine screws or welded threaded studs on steel work.
3.2
Device plates as specified, or noted elsewhere, shall be provided for each outlet to suit
the device installed. Plates shall be installed with all 4 edges in continuous contact
with finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. Plates shall be
installed vertically with an alignment tolerance of 1/16". The use of sectional device
plates will not be permitted.
3.3
Wall switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
When located near doors, they shall be installed on the lock side of the door; unless
otherwise noted.
3.4
Telephone and convenience receptacle wall outlet boxes shall be set flush 18" above
finished floor unless otherwise noted.
3.5
Outlet boxes shall be installed at the approximate locations shown on the drawings, or
within 2'-0" of the location as directed by the Architect-Engineer.
3.6
Outlet boxes for devices located on opposite sides of one-hour and two-hour walls
shall be separated by a minimum horizontal distance of 24 inches.
3.7
Where outlet boxes are flush-mounted in rated walls, clearance between wallboard
facing and box shall not exceed 1/8", per U.L. requirements. In non-rated walls,
clearances shall not exceed those permitted by the NEC.
END OF SECTION
16134 - 2
LK 13534
SECTION l 6140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere or shown on the drawings, all switches shall be
quiet type, rated 120-277 v AC as specified. Lock-type switches shall be of comparable
grade, complete with 1 key for each switch. Switches shall be loaded to not more than
80% of their rating.
1.2
Where shown near doors, wall switches shall be mounted not less than 2" and not
more than 12" from trim. Switches shall be installed near "strike" side of door.
1.3
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, all standard duplex receptacles shall be 20
ampere, 120-volt and shall be installed with ground pole at top.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
DEVICES:
A.
Wiring devices shall be specification grade as manufactured by Hubbell,
Arrow-Hart, Eagle or Sierra. All devices shall be ivory in color (unless
otherwise indicated).
B.
Wall switches shall be specification grade.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, receptacles shall be specification grade.
PLATES:
A.
Device plates for flush mounted devices shall be smooth plastic (except as
otherwise indicated), single gang or multi-gang as required to fit the boxes and
devices at each location.
B.
Device plates for outdoor receptacles shall be of the in use type and equal to
those manufactured by TAYMAC or CARLON.
C.
All cover plates in kitchen areas shall be stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Device plates shall be installed plumb, with all edges in continuous contact with the
wall surface.
3.2
Receptacles installed outdoors shall be GPO type in 4" square flush mounted box.
3.3
Outlets which must be surface mounted outdoors shall be mounted in cast boxes.
3.4
Outlets which must be surface mounted indoors shall be installed in cast boxes with
cover plates appropriate for the box and the device.
16140 - 1
LK 13534
3.5
Mounting heights of all devices shall be in accordance with ADA requirements.
END OF SECTION
16140 - 2
LK 13534
SECTION 16180
MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL (Refer to MECHANICAL DIVISIONS)
1.1
All electrical motors shall be NEMA Standard Design suited for the proper application.
All motors shall be wired for the voltage indicated on the plans.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Refer to MECHANICAL DIVISIONS)
2.1
Horsepower and/or amperage ratings indicated on the electrical drawings are for
guidance only and do limit the equipment size. When electrically driven equipment
furnished under other Divisions of these specifications materially differs from the
contemplated design, this contractor shall coordinate the necessary adjustments to the
wiring, disconnect switches, and branch current protection devices to accommodate the
equipment actually installed and approved by the Architect-Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A complete typewritten schedule giving motor nameplate data for• all motors 1/6
horsepower and larger shall be prepared by the Contractor• and turned over to the
Architect-Engineer• prior to the final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
16180 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16185
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
This Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor as to the sizing of
motor controllers and thermal overloads for equipment and apparatus supplied by that
Contractor.
1.2
This Contractor shall cooperate in all matters pertaining to the Mechanical Controls
with the Controls Contractor who will be responsible for the overall operation and
supervision of the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Manual starters shall be provided for single phase, fractional horsepower motors ½
horsepower and smaller or as noted on the drawings. Manual starters shall be single- or
2-pole and with selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights, and locking attachment as
required, and enclosed in NEMA enclosure. Starters shall be equal to Square D "FG" or
"FS" series.
2.2
Except where noted on the Drawings to be furnished by the electrical Contractor, all
magnetic starters and control equipment for motors shall be furnished under DIVISION
15.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Check each starter to determine that properly sized overload devices have been
installed.
END OF SECTION
16185 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
NAMEPLATES
A.
The following items shall be equipped with nameplates:
1.
All motor starters, pushbutton stations, control panels, time switches.
2.
Disconnect switches, fused and unfused, switchboards and panelboards,
circuit breakers, contactors or relays in separate enclosures.
3.
Special electrical systems shall be properly identified at junction and pull
boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment racks.
B.
INSCRIPTION
1.
Nameplates shall adequately describe the function or use of the
particular equipment involved. Where nameplates are detailed on the
drawings, inscription and size of letters shall be as shown. Nameplates
for panelboards shall include the panel designation, voltage and phase
of the supply.
2.
For example, "Panel A, 120/208 v, 3-phase, 4 wire". The name of the
machine on the motor nameplates for a particular machine shall be the
same as the one used on all motor starters, disconnects and PB station
nameplates for that machine.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES
A.
Nameplates shall be laminated Phenolic plastic, BLACK front-and-back with
WHITE core, with lettering etched through the outer covering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.2
At all locations, lettering shall be 1/4" high, unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Nameplates shall be securely fastened to the equipment with No. 4
Phillips', round-head, cadmium plated, steel self-tapping screws. Adhesives will
not be accepted
Junction box covers shall be identified in accordance with system served, eg. "FA" for
Fire Alarm, "IC" for Intercom, etc. In addition, all junction boxes for fire alarm system
shall be painted RED. For junction boxes only, identification may be provided utilizing
indelible markers, provided marking is neat and legible.
END OF SECTION
16195 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16212
EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
RELATED WORK
A.
1.3
Applicable provisions of the General Conditions and of Division 1, General
Requirements, govern all work specified in this Section.
The following sections specify related work:
1.
Electrical, General Provisions.
2.
Electrical, Basic materials and methods.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section of these Specifications covers only the emergency generator
and accessories related thereto.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EMERGENCY GENERATOR
A.
Emergency generator shall be Cummins, Onan, Kohler or equal,
complete automatic starting packaged diesel engine-generator unit for 3phase, 4-wire, 60 hz, voltage regulated, with a voltage and KW rating as
indicated. Rating shall be based upon the unit operating with engine driven
fan, radiator, and all accessories, in 100 F. ambient temperature, and using
standard locally available diesel fuel. Engine-generator unit shall include all
features specified below, and all other standard and necessary accessories
required for a complete operational unit.
1.
The engine shall be a 4 cycle naturally aspirated or turbocharged liquid
cooled type, of sufficient capacity to operate the generator at specified
capacity without overloading or overheating, at 1800 maximum RPM,
and in 100 F. ambient temperature. The engine shall be complete with:
full pressure lubrication; speed governor; 12 or 24 volt dc electric starter
of sufficient capacity to crank the engine continuously for at least 30
seconds at zero degrees F. Ambient temperature; engine driven battery
charging alternator with voltage regulator; engine driven water pump
and fan, radiator, and thermostatic control to maintain stable and
efficient operating temperature under all load conditions; full flow
lubricating oil filter; air cleaner; critical area type exhaust muffler; fuel
injection system; fuel filter; engine driven fuel pump; safety cut-off
controls for low lubricating oil pressure, high jacket water temperature,
and overspeed; lubricating oil pressure gauge, water temperature
indicator, and thermostatically controlled 115 volt water jacket heater
sized to maintain jacket water temperature between 60 and 80 F. in all
ambient temperatures down to zero F. at all times.
16212 - 1
LK 13534
2.
3.
4.
2.2
STARTING BATTERY
A.
2.3
Fuel storage tank shall be built into the generator base and shall have capacity
to operate the generator for a minimum of 24 hours.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A.
2.6
Provide auxiliary battery charger to keep battery fully charged at all times when
engine is not running. Charger shall be solid state constant voltage, current limiting, infinite taper type, suitable for 120 volt 60 hz single phase power supply.
FUEL STORAGE TANK, TAPPINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
2.5
Starting battery shall be Delco, Exide or Chloride, 12 or 24 volts as required,
capacity as required to crank the engine continuously for• at least 45 seconds at
zero degrees F. ambient temperature.
AUXILIARY BATTERY CHARGER
A.
2.4
The generator shall be of the revolving field type conforming to NEMA
standards direct connected to engine with a suitable coupling, with static
type exciter, Class F insulated.
Generator control panel shall include: a voltmeter with three pole transfer
switch; ammeter with transfer switch for metering all three phases;
voltage regulator; exciter and voltage controls; main circuit breaker;
frequency meter; automatic start-stop controls; manual starting switch;
and an adjustable clock type exerciser which will automatically start and
stop the engine at preselected time intervals and run the engine for a
preselected time, without load transfer.
The entire engine-generator unit shall be factory assembled and
mounted on a welded structural steel skid type base suitable for
mounting on a concrete foundation, and fully enclosed in a rustproofed
metal weatherproof housing with lockable hinged or removable access
panels.
Onan electrically operated electrically held type in NEMA 1 enclosure. Switch
shall have a center off position controlled by a programmable time delay. The
switch shall be service entrance rated.
REMOTE STATUS ALARM PANEL
A.
Provide a remote status alarm panel, located where required by Architect, to
indicate the following conditions:
1.
High coolant temperature.
2.
Low oil pressure.
3.
Low fuel.
4.
High battery voltage.
5.
Low battery voltage.
6.
Overcrank.
7.
Overspeed.
16212 - 2
LK 13534
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EMERGENCY GENERATOR
A.
3.2
BATTERIES
A.
3.3
Install engine-generator unit on a concrete foundation 12" high and 2" larger
than unit plan view dimensions all around, with vibration absorbing mountings
between unit and foundation, as specified below.
1.
Vibration absorbing mountings shall be steel spring type, sized as
recommended by the mounting manufacturer for the service involved, and
securely attached to slab and generator unit base.
2.
Provide proper quantity and grade of lubricating oil in engine crankcase.
3.
Provide complete water fill in cooling system, with sufficient Prestone or
as approved ethylene glycol type anti-freeze to protect the system from
freezing at ambient temperatures down to 20 degrees below zero F.
Install batteries on a suitable steel rack inside of engine-generator housing
with bottoms of batteries 6" above floor. Provide suitable cables from batteries to
generator unit.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A.
This switch shall automatically:
1.
Start emergency generator upon loss of normal power•.
2.
Transfer the load to the emergency power supply, after an adjustable time
delay following establishment of emergency power.
3.
After an adjustable time delay following restoration of normal power
supply, transfer the load back to the normal power supply, and then stop
the emergency generator following an additional adjustable time delay
after• transfer to normal power.
END OF SECTION
16212 - 3
LK 13534
SECTION 16440
EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Disconnect switches shall be fusible or non-fusible as indicated on the plans.
Switches shall be fusible whenever required by manufacturer of equipment served.
1.2
All disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty type, quick-make, quick-break or as
shown on the plans. Disconnect switches for motor circuits shall be horsepowerrated.
1.3
Disconnect switches shall have a cover interlock, with defeat device, to prevent
unauthorized personnel from opening the door when the switch is on.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
All disconnect switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "OFF"
position when the door is open. Disconnect switches shall be of dead-front construction
with permanently attached arc suppressors hinged or otherwise attached to permit easy
access to line-side lugs without removal of the arc suppressor. Lugs shall be UL listed
for copper and/or aluminum cables and front removable. All current-carrying parts shall
be plated by electrolytic processes.
2.2
Disconnect switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures except
NEMA 3 or 3R (Raintight) shall be used in damp locations.
2.3
Enclosures shall be of code gage (UL 98) sheet steel or code gage (UL 98)
galvanized steel. They shall be treated with a rust-inhibiting phosphate and finished in
Gray baked enamel. Disconnect switches shall be horsepower-rated for 250 Volts AC or
DC, or 600 Volts AC as required.
2.4
Fusible disconnect switches shall be equipped with a device to reject all non-class "R"
fuses. Switches shall withstand up to 200,000 amps RMS symmetrical.
2.5
All disconnect switches shall be identified with engraved laminated plastic labels as
described in Section 16195.
2.6
All disconnect switches shall be Square "D". Equal units as manufactured by G.E.,
Cutler Hammer, or ITE will be considered.
END OF SECTION
16440 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
The entire Electrical System and Building Structure shall be grounded. The following
items of equipment, appurtenances, and as required by Article 250 of the NEC, shall be
grounded:
A.
Electric Service, Equipment and Enclosures.
B.
Conduits and Raceways.
C.
Neutral and Ground Conductors,
D.
Switches, Breakers, Panels.
E.
Motor Frames, Controller Cabinets, Lighting Fixtures, and building structure.
F.
Swimming Pool and Related Equipment.
R E L A T E D W OR K :
A.
Section 16000: Electrical - General Provisions.
B.
Section 16120: Wires and Cables,
CODE AND STANDARD COMPLIANCE:
A.
NEC: Article 250.
B.
UL: Standards 467 and 869.
C.
IEEE: Standards 142 and 241.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
All products shall comply with NEC, UL and IEEE as applicable.
2.2
All grounding conductors shall be copper.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Bonding jumpers to maintain ground continuity at raceway and pull box expansion
joints shall be stranded cable or copper braid sized in accordance with Article 250 of the
NEC and installed with approved ground fittings.
16450 - 1
LK 13534
3.2
Grounding jumpers shall be installed across all water meters. Jumpers shall be
stranded bare copper cable or copper bus attached by means of exothermic welds to
the water pipe.
3.3
Grounding shall be accomplished by means of a metallic water system, where
possible, or grounding assemblies. Where not possible, the following method shall be
used:
A.
Ground rods shall be installed with the top of the rods at least 6" below finished
grade. Grounding conductors shall be so installed as to permit shortest and most
direct path from equipment to ground. All connections to ground conductors shall
be accessible for inspection and made with exothermic welds, or approved bolted
connectors where permitted. All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned
before connections are made to insure good metal-to-metal contact.
B.
Single-Rod assemblies shall consist of 1 copper-clad steel ground rod 3/4"
diameter, length as required by ground test section with minimum length of 8'-0".
All connections to the rod shall be made with exothermic welds.
3.4
Grounding Connectors: Cadweld exothermic at all rods and terminations below
grade; bolted pressure connectors shall be used above grade.
3.5
All connections and terminations below grade shall be left exposed until such time as
they have been inspected and approved by the Architect-Engineer.
3.6
After grounding system has been completely installed, and before any equipment is
placed in operation, the Electrical Contractor shall perform a test of the network in the
presence of an authorized representative of the Architect-Engineer. This test shall be
performed by use of a ground resistance tester. The resistance between ground and
absolute earth shall not exceed 3.0 Ohms. Provide additional ground rods, as necessary
until the resistance requirements are achieved.
3.7
Where the underground portion of a metallic water pipe system being used for the
grounding electrode is less than 301-0", additional electrodes shall be used as outlined in
Article 250 of the NEC,
3.8
System grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC Table.
Equipment grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC Table.
3.9
Provide separate green ground conductor in each receptacle circuit. Attach to
receptacle by means of "pigtail" tap so that removal of any device will not affect
grounding of other devices.
3.10
Provide #6 AWG (minimum) bare copper grounding conductor from telephone
equipment location and connect to service ground. Run underground, in conduit.
3.11
Provide separate green grounding conductor in each panel board feeder.
16450 - 2
LK 13534
3.12
Provide separate internal green grounding conductor in each flexible conduit used
for motor connection.
END OF SECTION
16450 - 3
LK 13534
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART I - GENERAL
1.l
Panelboards shall be of the dead-front safety type equipped with circuit breakers and
shallbe of the type shown on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with the
type, size and number of branch circuit breakers arranged and numbered as shown
on the drawings. Where main circuit breaker is shown, it shall be of the type and size
indicated. Panelboards shall be enclosed in code-gage steel cabinet complete with
door, door cylinder lock, circuit identification, directory holder, neutral bar, ground
bus and lugs for all cable connections. All locks shall be keyed alike. Where
"SPACE" is indicated, mounting hardware shall be provided and space shall be
bussed for future breakers. Panel fronts shall be provided with removable 1-pole
fillers in spaces. Branch connectors, mounting brackets and other hardware shall be
provided for future breakers as indicated on the drawings. Circuit-breaker units shall
be mounted on channel iron or formed-steel mounting backs, drilled and tapped so
that units of same frame size and number of poles may be interchanged and
removed from the front without disturbing the adjacent units. Panels shall be bussed
according to the requirements shown on the drawings, and shall have lugs equipped
with approved connectors for the size of conductor feeding the panel. Double lugs
shall be provided for handling double feeder conductors. All lugs shall be solderless
type. Each circuit shall be permanently numbered. Each panel shall have a
typewritten directory mounted under a transparent protective cover, set in a metal
frame on the inside of the cabinet door.
1.2
All panelboards shall be suitably rated for the available fault currents on this project.
Available fault currents shall be obtained from the serving utility company. A letter from
the utility company stating the maximum available fault current(s) shall be included with
the submittal data.
1.3
Panelboards shall be listed for use as service entrance equipment, where required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
All panelboards shall have nameplates as described in SECTION 16195.
2.2
All bus bars, including ground bar, shall be tinned copper, 98% conductivity.
2.3
All panelboards shall be standard units as manufactured by Square "D" Company.
Equal units as manufactured by ITE or Cutler Hammer will be considered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
The panelboard directory shall contain the following information:
A.
Panel designation and voltage.
B.
Distribution panel from which it is fed.
16470 - 1
LK 13534
C.
For each circuit breaker, complete information concerning the outlet controlled,
including the room number or area designated on the plans.
3.2
Panelboards shall be installed with top device 51-6" above finished floor unless
otherwise indicated.
3.3
Where ceiling space exists, recessed panelboards shall have spare conduits stubbed
above ceiling. Install one 3/4" conduit for each 2 spare breakers and/or blank spaces.
3.4
Panelboard nameplates shall be mounted on exterior trim so as to remain visible with
panelboard door closed.
END OF SECTION
16470 - 2
LK 13534
SECTION 16475
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Fuses shall not be shipped installed in switches in electrical equipment, nor shall they
be shipped to the job site, until the equipment is ready to be energized.
1.2
Standard dimension fuses 600 amps or less (Class RK-1) shall be installed in the
switches serving circuit breaker panels unless otherwise noted.
1.3
Standard dimension fuses 600 amps or less (Class RK-5) shall be installed in all other
switches and shall be dual-element, time delay type with a spring actuated thermal
overload element that operates at 280°F temperature.
1.4
Motor protection dual-element fuses installed in individual circuits shall be sized at
125% of motor nameplate current rating or the next standard fuse size. (or as
recommended by equipment manufacturer)
1.5
This Specification covers molded case circuit breakers rated 15 through 1,000
amperes, 120 V AC, 240 V AC, 277 V AC, and 480 V AC. Breakers covered under
this Specification may be installed in panelboards, combination motor starters, and
individual enclosures. Circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall
have trip ratings as shown.
1.6
Molded case circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break thermal-magnetic
type. They shall have wiping type contacts. Each shall be provided with arc chutes,
individual trip mechanisms on each pole. 2- and 3-pole breakers shall be integral
common trip. All breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of
1.7
Molded case circuit breakers shall be trip-free. Each breaker shall have trip indication
independent of the "ON" or "OFF" positions.
1.8
Breakers shall be capable of being mounted in enclosures without the use of base
insulators between the breaker and the enclosure.
1.9
Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive
instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breaker in
order to give "flash protection" for frayed stranded wire cords. Circuit breakers serving
HVAC equipment shall be HACR type, where applicable. Breakers used or intended for
switching duty shall carry "SWD" label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
All fuses shall be of the same manufacture to retain selectivity as designed.
2.2
All fuses shall be current limiting with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity as
manufactured by BUSSMANN (Cooper Industries), or equal as manufactured by
GOULD SHAWMUT.
16475 - 1
LK 13534
2.3
Class RK-1 Fuses shall be BUSSMANN KTNR (KTSR) Limitron fast-acting fuse or
equal as manufactured by GOULD SHAWMUT.
2.4
Class RK-5 Fuses shall be BUSSMANN LPNR (LPSR) Low-Peak Dual-Element Fuse
or FRN (FRS) Fusetron Dual-Element Fuse, or equal as manufactured by GOULD
SHAWMUT.
2.5
All molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA Standards
Publication No. ABI-1964. All devices shall meet Federal Specification No. W-C-375A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
20% spare fuses or a minimum of 3 of each size and type shall be delivered to the
Owner at the completion of the Project.
3.2
A fuse identification label, showing type and size, shall be placed inside the door of
each switch.
3.3
Furnish and install surge arresters on incoming secondary electrical service for
lightning protection. Installation shall be in accordance with NEC Article 280.
END OF SECTION
16475 - 2
LK 13534
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all luminaries, lighting equipment and
components shown on the plans, listed in the Fixture Schedule and specified herein. He
shall furnish all labor and Materials to install specified equipment in the manner
indicated.
1.2
All luminaries and lighting equipment shall be delivered to the project site complete
with suspension accessories, canopies, hickeys, casings, sockets, holders, reflectors,
ballasts, diffusing material, louvers, plaster frames, recessing boxes, etc., all wired and
assembled as indicated.
1.3
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install lamps and accessory wiring as
specified herein.
1.4
Luminaries with medium-base sockets shall be wired with no smaller than No. 16
"AWG" and Mogul Sockets with no smaller than No. 14 "AWG" Fixture wire and not less
than 90°C insulation.
Fluorescent luminaries shall be wired with no smaller than No. 16 "AWG" Fixture wire.
No splice or tap shall be located within an arm, stem or chain. Wire shall be
continuous from splice in outlet box of the building wiring system to lamp socket, or to
ballast terminals and shall be no smaller than No. 12 "AWG" and not less than 90°C
insulation.
1.5
1.6
STANDARDS:
A.
ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
B.
CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LAMPS
A.
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS shall be of the wattage, voltage and
lumen output, horizontal or vertical burning type, with a rated average life, as that
of lamps manufactured by the General Electric Company or approved equal, as
indicated in the Fixture Schedule. Lumen output at 70% rated life shall not be
less than 80% of initial output. Any lamp failing during the first 120 days of
burning shall be considered defective and shall be replaced and installed without
cost by the Electrical Contractor.
B.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS shall be of the wattage, voltage and lumen output,
with a rated average life as that of lamps manufactured by the General Electric
Company or approved equal, as indicated in the Fixture Schedule. Lumen
output at 33% rated life shall not be less than 80% of initial output. Any lamps
failing during the first 80 days of burning shall be considered defective and
16500 - 1
LK 13534
shall be replaced and installed without cost by the Electrical Contractor. Lamp
color shall be as indicated.
C.
2.2
2.3
BALLASTS
A.
All fluorescent ballasts shall be U.L. Listed and of the electronic high power
factor type. Ballasts for outdoor installations shall be rated for low temperature
operation.
B.
All high intensity discharge ballasts shall be of the regulating, high-power factor,
(.90 or above) saturated iron or grain originated silicon iron and encapsulated.
Capacitors to be field replaceable. Ballasts shall be capable of maintaining
correct lamp operation over a voltage input of +10% from normal, in addition to
accepting a voltage input reduction of 40% minimum before lamp dropout occurs.
Ballasts shall have Class "F" insulation, designed for 105°F ambient, suitable for
operation of both mercury and multi-vapor lamps, designed to start lamps at
ambient temperature of -20°F and have a 10 KV nominal BIL minimum.
LENS
A.
2.4
Lens for Fluorescent troffers shall be clear acrylic, Type K-12, (.125") as
manufactured by the K-Lite Division of ICI Acrylics, Inc. (formerly 'KSH') or
approved equal; except unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
THERMAL CUT-OUT
A.
2.5
INCANDESCENT LAMPS shall be of the wattage as indicated in the Fixture
Schedule, with a rated average life of 2,000 hours for "PAR" and "R" lamps,
2,000 hours for quartzline, 4,000 hours for "PAR-Q" lamps and 750 hours for
"A" - "PS" lamps. Lumen output at 70% of rated life shall not be less than 80%
of initial output. Any lamps failing during the first 20 days of operation shall be
considered defective and shall be replaced and installed without cost by the
Electrical Contractor.
Recessed Incandescent Fixtures shall have UL listed Thermal Cut-Out
protection.
Provide T-bar safety clips for each fixture installed in T-bar type ceiling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
This Contractor shall take special note of the voltage that fluorescent and highintensity discharge fixtures are to be operated at.
3.2
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure his count by type as well as
voltage prior to ordering. Extras will not be allowed for any errors by this Contractor.
3.3
All fixtures shall be square and level in relation to surrounding materials and space.
3.4
Lamps are exempt from the one-year guarantee in Section 16000, but one complete
set of clean and operating lamps shall be in place at the time of final inspection.
16500 - 2
LK 13534
3.5
This contractor shall coordinate with the ceiling contractor before ordering fixtures to
ensure that the fixtures ordered have the proper mounting features to be compatible with
the ceiling types.
3.6
All fixtures shall be protected from general construction and shall be thoroughly
cleaned prior to final inspection.
3.7
All ceiling mounted fixtures shall be supported independently of the ceiling membrane.
3.8
All fixtures intended for floodlighting or spotlighting shall be aimed at night for optimum
illumination of the area or object intended.
3.9
Outdoor poles shall be installed on a reinforced concrete base. The Contractor is
hereby instructed to have the pole bases designed by a structural engineer to suit the
actual poles to be installed and to suit the soil conditions encountered. Poles shall
otherwise be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Completed installation, including fixtures, shall be capable of withstanding 90 mph
steady winds with gusts up to 100 mph.
END OF SECTION
16500 - 3
LK 13534
SECTION 16700
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
A.
WORK INCLUDED
1.
Provide all labor, material, equipment, and services to perform operations
required for the complete installation and related work as specified.
2.
Any such work included in any other section of these specifications that is
not specifically described therein shall comply with the requirements of
this section.
3.
The following items of work are specifically included in, but not limited to
the generality implied by these specifications:
a.
EASE lightning protection air terminal
b.
Complete mast, base, and supports.
c.
Down conductors
d.
Grounding terminations
B.
RELATED WORK
1.
Form EASE-1-90
a.
The completed form EASE-1-90 shall be returned to the EASE
manufacturer for certification, verification, archiving, and system
documentation.
C.
SUBMITTALS
1.
Submit ten (10) sets of shop drawings showing location of EASE air
terminal, conductors, bonding connections, and grounding equipment.
Shop drawings shall include sizes for conductors, ground electrodes, and
connection/termination details. All shop drawings shall include a
verifiable phone number and address of the EASE manufacturer or
supplier.
2.
Submit detailed product data sheets showing application, dimensions,
and material of each component utilized in the lightning protection system
installation.
3.
Submit proof of installer’s approval or certification by the EASE system
manufacturer.
4.
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under other provisions.
D.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.
Submit project record documents under other provisions.
2.
Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, bonding/grounding
equipment, and conductors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
EASE AIR TERMINAL
1.
Complete EASE air terminal assembly
a.
Threaded base for connection to mast.
b.
Continuous chromium plated copper central air terminal
c.
Sealed stainless steel housing
16700 - 1
LK 13534
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
The air terminal shall release stored energy based upon rapid
variation of ambient field strength
e.
The air terminal shall be tested per appendix C of NFC 17-102 or
similar international standard and/or test procedure.
Air terminals that utilize a spark gap or pulsed release are not acceptable.
Air terminals that utilize a central rod that is isolated from ground are not
acceptable.
Air terminals that utilized radioactive ionization sources are not
acceptable.
Plate indicating name and phone number of the EASE air terminal
manufacturer.
Minimum of five (5) year full replacement warranty.
Air terminal shall meet or exceed international EASE standards:
a.
French Standard NF C 17-102
b.
Spain Standard U N E 21186
c.
Yugoslavian Standard JUS N.B4.810
d.
Slovakian Standard STN 34-1391
e.
Romanian Standard I-20
f.
Argentina Standard IRAM 2426
g.
Macedonia Standard MKS N.B4.810
h.
Portugal Standard NP 4426
CONDUCTORS
1.
Copper conductors shall be 37 strand copper wire with a minimum net
weight of 410 lbs. per 1,000 ft. (187.97kg per 304.8m). Tinned copper
strip of equivalent capacity/weight may be substituted.
2.
The structural steel may be utilized as the main down conductor.
a.
Structural steel shall be electrically continuous or made so.
b.
Perimeter columns shall be grounded or at intervals not exceeding
an average of 60 feet (18.2 M) on center.
3.
All conductors shall be securely fastened to the structure at every 36"
(914.4mm) on center utilizing fasteners with corrosion resistance equal to
that of the conductor.
4.
All metal objects of induction situated within 15' 0" (4.5 M) of a lightning
protection conductor or bonded metal body shall be interconnected to the
lightning protection system.
a.
Grounded metal bodies shall be interconnected to the lightning
protection system via a main size conductor.
b.
Ungrounded metal bodies shall be interconnected to the lightning
protection system via a secondary conductor no smaller than #6
AWG (13.3 mm2) copper.
5.
No copper materials shall be installed upon a dissimilar metal. Tin coated
copper and bronze equipment shall be installed where these conditions
exist.
6.
Tin or lead coated copper and bronze equipment shall be utilized where
corrosive atmospheres are present.
7.
Lightning protection conductors shall maintain a downward or horizontal
path to ground avoiding U and V pockets with the following exception:
a.
A conductor may rise no more than 3" (76.2mm) for every 12"
(304.8 cm) of run.
16700 - 2
LK 13534
8.
9.
10.
No bend of conductor shall form a final included angle of less than 90
degrees nor shall have a radius of less than 8 inches (203.2 mm).
Exceptions are thru roof and thru wall connections.
Each EASE air terminal shall be provide with two (2) paths to ground from
the base plate of the mast, with the exception of an elevated mast that
may have a single conductor run for a maximum of 16 feet (4.8 meters)
before two (2) down conductors are implemented.
Down conductors shall be installed as widely separated as possible.
C.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION MAST
1.
Aluminum, steel, or galvanized steel masts
a.
Height as required by application.
b.
Threaded connection for acceptance of EASE air terminal.
c.
Bonding plate for cable connection.
d.
Mast shall be structured as required by wind and safety factors
inherent to the geographic location of the installation.
2.
Anchor base and direct burial masts shall provide the following Effective
Projected Area (EPA) data as based upon AASHTO code.
a.
Wind velocity based upon safety factors inherent to the
geographic location.
b.
Moment of inertia.
c.
Section modulus
d.
Allowable stress at base
e.
Bending allowable stress
f.
Shear allowable stress
g.
Longitudinal moment
h.
Longitudinal shear
i.
Transverse moment
j.
Transverse shear
k.
Torsion moment
l.
Combined moment
m.
Combined shear
n.
Axial load
o.
Maximum overturn moment
p.
Combined stress ratio
3.
As indicated on lightning protection drawing(s)
4.
Certified or accepted by the EASE system manufacturer.
D.
GROUNDING SYSTEM.
1.
The ground system shall have no more than 10 ohms of resistance.
2.
Acceptable Ground terminations
a.
Ground rods: 3/4"x 10' (19.0mm x 304.8mm) copper-clad (3 per
down lead)
b.
Electrolytic ground electrodes (1 per down lead) may be used in
lieu of or in combination with ground rods, and plates to achieve
the 10-ohm resistance requirement.
c.
Ground loop conductors shall be a minimum of 2/0 AWG
(67.4mm2) stranded bare copper. Each down conductor shall
terminate at a ground rod. The ground rod shall be connected to
the ground loop.
16700 - 3
LK 13534
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
All ground connections shall be accomplished via Burndy HYGROUND
fittings or exothermic connections.
Connections to ground rods, ground plates, electrolytic ground
electrodes, or ground loop conductors shall be made at a point not less
than 24 inches (609.6mm) away form foundation walls and 18 inches
(457.2 mm) below grade,
Ground terminations shall be spaced as evenly as possible around the
building perimeter.
All grounded systems shall be bonded together via main size conductor to
achieve equal potential of all grounded systems. All such connections
shall be accomplished via exothermic welding where possible.
CONNECTORS, FASTENERS, AND HARDWARE
1.
Provide all connectors, fittings, fasteners, clamps, guards, lugs,
exothermic connections, etc. as required to install all parts of the lightning
protection system. All material should be listed where applicable. All
equipment shall be fabricated from copper and/or bronze material for the
use intended.
2.
All connections between dissimilar metals shall be executed with tinned
copper or tinned bronze equipment and treated with Penetrox A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
EXAMINATION
1.
Verify that all surfaces are ready to receive work.
2.
Verify and compare dimensions and measurements shown on shop
drawings with field conditions.
3.
Verify that all systems that may influence the lightning protection system
design are included or referenced on the shop drawings.
B.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
1.
Install EASE lightning protection system in accordance with
manufacturer=s instructions.
2.
Installation shall be accomplished in a neat and orderly manner by an
installer approved or certified by the EASE system manufacturer.
3.
All work inside the building shall be concealed.
4.
All wall, roof, and other penetrations shall be sealed as required and
performed by the appropriate trade.
5.
All structural applications shall be coordinated with the project structural
engineer and all other applicable trades.
6.
Protect elements under other sections from damage or disfiguration
during work under this section.
7.
All adhesive lightning protection components shall be installed with an
adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer.
8.
All work installed in accessible areas shall be properly guarded and
protected from damage.
9.
All material shall be installed in a manner to protect against electrolytic
couple in the presence of moisture.
C.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1.
Field inspections will be held and documented.
16700 - 4
LK 13534
a.
b.
For inspection of down conductors prior to being covered by
interior, exterior, or other installations.
For inspection of lightning protection system grounds prior to
burial.
PART 4 - ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS
A.
NAMES AND PHONE NUMBERS
1.
National Lightning Protection Corp. 800-628-2816
B.
SUBSTITUTIONS
1.
Written requests for substitution shall be made a minimum of ten (10)
days prior to bid date for consideration.
a.
Test data showing the EASE air terminals Δt values.
b.
Calculations per the referenced standards using the Δt value
above.
c.
Effective Projected Area (EPA) calculations for proposed mast to
be utilized as specified in section II part C of this specification.
d.
Submit copy of manufacturers EASE system warranty.
e.
Submit copy of lightning protection insurance certificate for
minimum of $10,000,000 per occurrence coverage.
f.
Submit a list of twenty (20) verifiable installations utilizing the
EASE terminal with names, addresses, and phone numbers of the
completed installations.
END OF SECTION
16700 - 5
LK 13534
SECTION 16720
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Furnish and install all conduit, wire and accessories to install an intelligent,
addressable, non-coded, continuously ringing, supervised integrated Fire Alarm
system. The system shall be UL listed as a powerlimited fire alarm system per
National Electric Code Article 760. System shall also be listed to National Fire
Prevention Association 72.
B.
The catalog numbers specified in the following are those of Simplex Time
Recorder Co. and constitute the type and quality of the equipment to be
furnished. Equipment manufactured by others may be considered as long as all
the features listed below are provided.
C.
If equipment of another manufacturer is submitted for approval, the contractor
shall state how much is to be deducted from his base bid for the substitution, and
also shall state what, if any, specific points differ from that as specified.
D.
A system capable of sensitivity monitoring as allowed by code is specified. If a
proposed system does not have the capabilities defined in section 1.02
paragraph H thru L, a maintenance and testing service providing the following
shall be included with the base bid and a contract issued with the submittals:
1.
Bi-annual sensitivity reading and logging for each sensor. This is to be
accomplished by use of a UL listed sensitivity calibration device per
requirement of NFPA-72.
2.
Scheduled bi-annual threshold adjustments to maintain proper sensitivity
for each smoke detector.
3.
Threshold adjustment to any smoke detector that has alarmed the system
without the presence of particles of combustion. This service shall be
performed with 4 hours of any such occurrence.
4.
Scheduled bi-annual cleaning or replacement of each smoke detector
within the system.
5.
If any device alarms the system without the presence of particle of
combustion twice within 30 days, it shall be cleaned or replaced.
6.
Semi-annual functional testing of each detector using the manufacturer's
calibrated test tool.
7.
Written documentation of all testing, cleaning, replacing, threshold
adjustment, and sensitivity reading for each smoke detector.
8.
The initial service included in the bid price shall provide the above listed
procedures for a period of five years after the owner's acceptance of the
system.
16720 - 1
LK 13534
1.2
E.
Include with the submittals a bill of material, battery calculations, a list of
approved installation conductors, riser diagram, zone listing and fire permit
review. Include a copy of the manufacture's warranty and the proof of compliance
with fire installer licensing requirements for those responsible for warranty
work.
F.
The system shall monitor the fire sprinkler system. Refer to the sprinkler
system plans for the locations of all flow and tamper switches and provide
connections as required such that each device has a separate address.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
The actuation of any approved alarm initiating device shall automatically
cause the following operations:
1.
Visually indicate by English language readout of the zone in alarm on an
LCD display on the front of the control panel.
2.
Continuously sound all audible and flash all visual indicating appliances
until the system is silenced or restored to normal and reset.
3.
Transmit signal to central station.
4.
Release all magnetically held doors.
5.
Shutdown all Air Handling Units.
6.
Illuminate the appropriate light on the annunciator.
B.
The general alarm devices may be silenced only by authorized personnel
entering a locked control cabinet and operating the proper silencing switch.
C.
Provide system Walk test for ease of equipment system testing and
maintenance. Program shall actually identify the zone being tested over the
indicating appliance circuits. Walk test shall also be capable of the following:
1.
Automatic abort for system integrity. If no zones within an active walk test
group activate for 8 hours, the 4020 system will aromatically abort the
walktest.
2.
Support up to 8 walk test groups to provide system reliability. This allows
a portion of the system to be tested while the rest is 100% active.
D.
Modules shall be supervised against removal. Removal of a module shall
activate a trouble condition.
E.
Provide a UL listed Alarm Verification feature to reduce nuisance alarms.
System operation shall be:
1.
Upon actuation of the first detector, a UL listed Alarm Verification routine
shall be activated for an initial time period. A second detector activation
shall sound the evacuation alarm.
2.
If after this time period no other alarm has been initiated, the original
detector shall automatically be reset and the system shall monitor this as
well as all other detectors for a second time period. Upon actuation of any
detector in this time period, the system shall sound the evacuation.
3.
If this second time period expires and no other device actuates, then the
system shall be returned to a "normal" state.
4.
The above shall be recorded on a printer with the time and date of
initiation to provide a printed record of the system's operation.
16720 - 2
LK 13534
5.
6.
Upon actuation of a manual station or a suppression system, the
evacuation alarm shall be activated immediately.
Establish up to eight alarm verification groups to further minimize
nuisance alarms. This will prevent a nuisance alarm in one wing or
building from verifying a nuisance alarm in another.
F.
The actuation of any elevator lobby smoke detector shall automatically
recall the elevators to the primary recall floor or if the fire is indicated on that
floor, then recall elevators to an alternate floor.
G.
The actuation of the elevator hoistway heat detector or elevator equipment
room heat detector shall automatically drop power to the elevators via a shunt
trip device and allow water to flood a previously thy sprinkler pipe via a
solenoid valve. Sprinkler valve shall be provide by the sprinkler contractor and
be compatible with the fire alarm system.
H.
System shall provide TrueAlarm smoke density measuring devices having no self
contained alarm set point (fixed threshold). The alarm decision for each sensor
shall be determined by the control panel.
I.
The panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors' smoke chamber
value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty
conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall automatically
maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the
floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. The smoke
obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable to within 0.3% of either limit of the UL
window (0.5% to 4.0%) to compensate for any environment.
J.
The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs
cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, a
"DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at
the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor
base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a
"DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a
second predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble
condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To
prevent false alarms, these "DIRTY— conditions shall in no way decrease the
amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation.
K.
The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on
each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the
accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that
fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with
the sensor location at the control panel.
L.
An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall be able to
manually access the following information for each sensor•:
1.
primary status
2.
device type
3.
present average value
4.
present sensitivity selected *
16720 - 3
LK 13534
5.
6.
1.3
peak detection values *
sensor range (normal, dirty, etc)
*Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that no
interpretation is required by the operator.
SY ST E M FE AT URE S
A.
The fire alarm system shall include the following features as a minimum:
B.
Resound feature which allows resounding of audible devices in the event of a
new zone in alarm.
C.
Resound on trouble which allows resounding of the trouble sonalert when
another trouble is indicated. Also provide a programmable trouble reminder
initially set for 60 minutes. Every 60 minutes, the trouble sonalert will sound to
remind the operator that a trouble condition exists.
D.
Capable of supporting a combination of conventional hardwired and addressable
zones in a single cabinet.
E.
The system shall be microprocessor based, programmable and of modular
construction. The system shall be programmable on site to accommodate
project changes. Systems requiring changes to be made at a factory shall not
be utilized. Full flexibility for selective input and output control based on
ANDing, ORing, NOTing, timing and special coded operations shall be
incorporated in the resident software.
F.
UL Listed for• NFPA A, B, C, D and Power Limited Applications per NEC 760.
G.
Capable of supervised control from function switches per NFPA 101. Capable
of supporting thirty smoke detectors with two wire bases on all initiating Circuits.
H.
A one minute programmable Alarm Silence Inhibit to limit Owner• liability. The
system shall prevent an evacuation alarm from being silenced for a period of one
minute after an alarm is initiated. Provide the capability of changing the inhibit
timing on site.
I.
Provide a five minute Indicating Appliance circuit cut out to extend system
operation on battery standby. After five minutes of alarm the system will turn
the evacuation signals off to conserve battery power should the fire have caused
the 120 vac supply to be shut off
J.
The historical log shall provide up to the last 300 alarms and 300 troubles in a
data file for maintenance purposes. The system shall recall alarms and troubles
in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history.
K.
Four levels of operator access with 19 individual passcodes shall provide the
owner with access control of the system. Level four shall be reserved for use by
technically trained representatives.
16720 - 4
LK 13534
L.
The passcode shall provide the owner or his representative to use the historical
log to determine which passcodes were utilized to access the various functions.
M.
Provide timed reactivation of particular functions upon reset. When the fire alarm
systems is reset, air handling units shall be sequentially started to avoid large
power surges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
FIRE ALARM CONTROL
A.
Provide and install where shown, a Simplex type 4020-8001 Fire Alarm Control
Panel, complete with all modules, power supplies, stand-by batteries, and
software for a complete and working system as shown on the plans and specified
herein.
B.
Provide non-volatile programmable memory within the control panel. Loss of
primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.
C.
Provide transformers, fuses, auxiliary relays for central station, AHU shutdown
and functions described to provide a working system as specified.
D.
Provide batteries sized for 24 hours of standby with 5 minutes of alarm or as
allowed by code.
E.
Provide an addressable interface module for communicating with up to 127
addressable devices.
INITIATING DEVICES
A.
Provide and install stations where shown on the plans:
1.
Addressable manual station, Simplex Type 2099-9795 semi-flush
mounted two gang switch box with a 2099-9813 adapter plate. Station
shall be equipped with key lock for resetting. All stations and control
panels shall be keyed alike.
B.
Provide and install smoke detectors where shown on the plans:
1.
Low profile addressable true alarm photoelectric smoke detector shall
be Simplex type 4098-9701 mounted on applicable base or duct
housing. The detector shall be listed to UL 268 and documented as
compatible with the control equipment to which it is connected. Provide
locking screw to secure the detector head to the base to discourage
removal. The detector shall be provided with a 30-mesh insect screen
and be completely shielded to protect against false alarms from EMI
and RFI. The detector head shall be easily disassembled to facilitate
cleaning.
2.
Addressable truealarm base Simplex type 4098-9785. The Base shall
provide an LED that locks on in alarm to provide quick and local
identification of the detector in alarm for fire response personnel.
3.
Duct Mounted addressable true alarm Housing shall be a Simplex type
40989706. The unit must be UL Listed for compatibility with and obtain its
power from the fire alarm control panel. Removal of the 4098-9701 shall
16720 - 5
LK 13534
4.
5.
2.3
activate a trouble signal at the fire alarm control panel. Duct smoke
detector trouble must be identified as required by NEPA 90A. Provide
programmable relay control in duct detector housing.
Addressable Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors shall be Simplex Type
2098-9645 with visible alarm LED that locks on in alarm to provide quick
and local identification of the detector in alarm for fire response
personnel.
For concealed duct detectors, provide a Simplex 2098-9808 remote
L.E.D.
C.
Provide and install heat detectors where shown on the plans:
1.
Addressable True Alarm Heat Detectors shall be Simplex Type 40989732 mounted on an addressable base, Simplex type 4098-9785.
D.
Water Flow Switches: Provided and installed by others and connected as
required.
E.
Tamper Switch: Provided and installed by others and connected as required.
F.
Post Indicator Switch: Provided and installed by others and connected as
required. Exterior junction boxes should be provided with tamper switches and
monitored by the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
G.
Isolated Loop Circuit Protector: Provide and install where shown on the plans a
Simplex type 2081-9027 ILCP to shunt stray transients to ground on initiating
device circuits. This device shall be listed to UL Standard #497B and located
on the inside of the wall where initiating device wiring leaves the protected
building. The ILCP shall have a line-to-line response time of less than one
nanosecond capable of accepting greater than 2000 amps at 28 Volts. Line to
earth response time shall be less than 25 nanoseconds with a maximum
current of 2000 amps (35 joules each line) to earth. Spark gap devices or
devices incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in lieu of
the specified protector are not acceptable.
H.
The guest room smoke detectors shall be system smoke detectors with sounder
bases. The guest room smoke detectors shall annunciate at the control panel
and annunciator panel and shall sound an alarm in affected room. Accessible
rooms and hearing impaired rooms shall have a system smoke detector with a
sounder base and a strobe light. Additionally, the accessible and hearing
impaired room shall have a system audio/visual device.
I.
Provide and install where shown on the plans Individually Addressable Modules
(IAM's), Simplex type 2190-9172. The Monitor IAM provides a unique address in
the system to monitor devices such as Sprinkler devices.
CONTROL AND SIGNAL DEVICES
A.
Provide and install as shown on the plans a Simplex Type 4903-9219 wall
mounted unit with white lens, red "FIRE" lettering, Horn/Xenon flasher
combination unit and either a terminal strip or in-out wiring to maintain signal
circuit supervision. This unit shall meet the requirements of A.D.A.
16720 - 6
LK 13534
2.4
B.
Provide and install as shown on the plans a Simplex Type 2901-9836 24 VDC
mini-horn rated at 90 db at ten feet. This unit shall mount in a single gang box
and be red in finish and have in/out wiring to allow circuit supervision.
C.
Provide and install as shown on the plans a Simplex model #4904-9137 visual
only unit. Unit shall be mounted vertically on a single gang backbox. This unit
shall meet the requirements of A.D.A.
D.
Provide and install as shown on the plans magnetic door holders, Simplex type
2088-9588. Units shall be wall mounted with concealed wiring and powered by
24 vdc from the control panel.
E.
Provide and install where shown on the plans a Simplex type 2081-9028 ILCP to
shunt stray transients to ground on indicating appliance circuits. This device
should be located on the inside of the wall where signal wiring leaves the
protected building. The ILCP shall have a line-to-line response time of less than
one nanosecond capable of accepting greater than 2000 amps at 28 Volts. Line
to earth response time shall be less than one nanosecond with a maximum
current of 2000 amps (35 joules each line) to earth. Spark gap devices or devices
incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in lieu of the
specified protector are not acceptable.
F
Provide and install required control Zone Adapter Module, Simplex type 21909163, to provide addressable control circuits.
G.
Provide and install where required a Simplex 4009 NAC Power• Extender. The
unit shall be listed to UL Standard 864 and configured with 4 or eight circuits as
required. The unit shall receive alarm inputs from a Host panel and maintain Host
Panel Earth Fault Detection. Provide Battery standby and extend FACP 120 vac
circuit to power• this panel.
ANNUNCIATION
A.
Provide and install where shown on the plans a remote serial LCD annunciator,
Simplex type 4603-9101.
B.
At each remote annunciator location, provide switches for alarm silence, trouble
silence and system reset. Provide a tone alert which duplicates the control panel
tone alert during alarm and trouble conditions. A key enable switch to activate or
deactivate the control switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING
A.
The contractor shall furnish and install in accordance with manufacturer's
instruction all wiring, conduit, and outlet boxes required for the erection of a
complete system as described herein and as shown on drawings.
16720 - 7
LK 13534
3.2
B.
All wiring shall meet National Electric Code Article 760 for Fire Alarm System
wiring. All wire shall be tagged at all junction points and shall test free of grounds
or crosses between conductors. The Fire alarm control panel shall be UL listed
as a Power Limited fire alarm control panel.
C.
Final connections between equipment and system wiring shall be made under
the direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer.
D.
Equipment shall be installed by a duly licensed electrical contractor or a duly
licensed Fire Alarm Installer as required by local code. The equipment warranty
must be provided by a licensed Fire Alarm Supplier.
E.
The installation should be provided with a single unified earth ground per Article
800-31 of the NEC (2011).
F.
Provide three copies of Operating and Installation manuals for the owners use,
Simplex publication FA4-31-201. The manuals shall cover system operation
during a fire or a trouble condition. Provide a section to describe possible
solutions for minor trouble indications. Provide installation checklists maximum
wire distance charts and other information to maximize the owners benefit.
Also include all basic system programming information to explain the optional
features for the owners use. Provide data sheets, parts lists, service numbers
and information to describe the system as it is installed. Provide three
separate logs in each manual for recording service, testing and alarm incidents.
Each of the three manuals shall be provided in a sturdy three ring binder.
GUARANTEE
A.
The contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent
mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of
accepted installation.
B.
Upon completion of the installation of fire alarm equipment the electrical
contractor shall provide to the owner a signed written statement substantially in
the form as follows:
C.
The undersigned having been engaged as the Electrical Contractor on Hyatt
Place Hotel confirms that the Fire Alarm equipment was installed in accordance
with the specifications and also in accordance with wiring diagrams, instructions,
and directions provided to us by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
16720 - 8
LK 13534
SECTION 16740
EMPTY CONDUIT FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
This Contractor shall furnish and install an EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM for the
Telephone System, as described in these specifications and indicated on the
drawings.
1.2
Furnish and install outlet boxes where shown on the drawings. Where these outlets
are combined with other outlets, proper barriers must be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Install a telephone type coverplate as required by the Owner on all outlet boxes that
are intended for telephone use.
2.2
Terminal-strips and wiring shall be supplied and installed as required by the telephone
company.
2.3
Provide 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood backboard at telephone service equipment location.
Paint with two coats of fire retardant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Minimum size raceway for telephone outlets shall be 3/4" conduit. Provide 1 conduit
run to terminal board from each outlet unless otherwise noted. Provide and leave in
place a suitable nylon pull cord to facilitate the installation of the telephone cables.
Provide factory bends for telephone conduit runs. Do not install more than two 90° bends
without installing a pull box. For conduit runs longer• than 1001-0", install a pull box.
3.2
Refer to Section 16450 for special grounding requirements.
3.3
Provide all trenching, backfill, conduits and pull-lines as may be required by the local
telephone company. Verify all quantities, sizes and locations of any conduits shown on
the drawings with the local telephone company prior to commencing installation.
END OF SECTION
16740 - 1
LK 13534
SECTION 16780
EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR TELEVISION ANTENNA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, and all other general
requirements of these specifications shall be considered a component part of this
division of the specifications.
B.
Bidders to this section shall review all other sections of these specifications. All
items in other sections relating to this section are as binding on this bidder as if
repeated herein.
SCOPE
A.
This section covers the empty conduit , boxes, pull wires, etc. for the television
antenna system. Attention is directed to all other sections of this division of the
specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT, BOXES, ETC.
A.
Conduit, boxes, etc., shall be as specified in Section 16100 of these
specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
CONDUIT SYSTEM
A.
All necessary conduits, wall boxes, plaster• rings, and plywood mounting boards
required by project conditions or the television equipment supplier shall be
provided. All lines concealed in walls or floor, etc., shall be run in conduit.
Exposed lines in attic may be run without conduit.
B.
Minimum conduit sizes shall be 3/4". Size all underground conduit as required by
the television antenna system supplier.
C.
Contractor shall obtain approval of intended locations and sizes of conduit from
the Owner's television antenna system supplier prior to installation.
D.
A standard single gang electrical box is required at each standard television
outlet.
TELEVISION ANTENNA WIRING AND EQUIPMENT
A.
The Owner will furnish, under a separate contract, all televisions, antennas,
terminal equipment, wires, and cables and make all connections required.
16780 - 1
LK 13534
3.3
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A.
The conduit shall not have any 90 degree bends, but shall have sweeps at 45
degrees.
B.
The conduit shall be glued at all connecting joints.
C.
The conduit shall protrude approximately 8" above the building floor level.
D.
All open ends shall be closed (taping is sufficient) so that foreign objects do not
enter the conduit.
E.
Provide a conduit from the equipment room to the satellite dish location in
accordance with the requirements of the owner's television equipment supplier.
END OF SECTION
16780 - 2
LK 13534
`